JP2018089455A - Game system - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce the risk of leakage of authentication information as much as possible when storing the authentication information for mutual authentication.SOLUTION: As authentication information for mutual authentication, SID of a CU communication control part 80 is stored in a ROM of the CU communication control part 80 in a chip manufacturing stage. The SID of a main control part 323 is stored in the CU communication control part 80 in CU manufacture. The SID of the CU communication control part 80 is downloaded from a key management server 800 and is stored in the main control part 323 as authentication information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system including an authentication information management device that manages authentication information and a gaming machine installed in a game hall.

  Conventionally, for example, there has been one that performs transmission / reception of ciphertexts using a common key cryptosystem between a main CPU that controls the gaming state of a gaming machine and a sub CPU that controls, for example, a variable display device (Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-31814 A (paragraphs [0030] to [0048])

  It is conceivable to improve the security by performing mutual authentication between both the CPUs using the shared key as pair authentication information to determine whether or not each other's CPUs are appropriate. Specifically, it is authenticated whether or not the partner CPU stores proper authentication information by transmitting and receiving information to and from each other using the authentication information.

  When performing such mutual authentication, it is necessary to store a pair of predetermined authentication information. The following methods can be considered as means for realizing this. For example, one of the paired authentication information is stored on one CPU side, the authentication information is not stored on the other CPU side, and both CPUs are assembled to the gaming machine in that state. After the attachment, the authentication information for the other CPU is transmitted from one CPU side, and the other CPU receives and stores it. As a result, one CPU and the other CPU can definitely store a pair of authentication information.

  However, when such a method is adopted, authentication information is transmitted between both CPUs, and thus there is a new concern that the transmitted authentication information may be leaked. In particular, in the case of both CPUs mounted on a gaming machine, since it is a device located in a local area compared to a server such as a management computer for halls and more in number than a server, it is easy for a person who attempts fraud. It becomes easy to access and intercept (wiretapping) authentication information in the middle of transmission, resulting in a security problem.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to reduce the risk of leakage of authentication information as much as possible when storing authentication information for mutual authentication.

(1) The present invention relates to an authentication information management apparatus (key management servers 800 and 803 in FIG. 6) that manages authentication information (SID and authentication key of a CU communication control unit or SID and authentication key of a payout control unit). And a gaming system (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S, card unit 3, card issuing device, Z counter, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in the game hall There,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control unit 323 or main control boards 16 and 116) connected to be able to communicate with the authentication information management device;
Second control means (CU communication control unit 80 or payout control units 17, 117) connected to be communicable with the first control means,
The first control means and the second control means include a pair of authentication information (the SID of the CU communication control unit and the SID of the main control unit, the authentication key as a common key, or the SID of the payout control unit). Authenticates whether or not the communication partner's control means is appropriate using the main control board SID (authentication key as a common key) (device authentication sequence in FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence in FIG. 27),
One of the authentication information for the pair is stored in advance in the second control means (the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in advance in the ROM 809 in FIG. 7, or the payout control units 17 and 117. The SID of the payout control unit is stored in advance in the ROM),
The first control means includes
Storage means (EEPROM 808, EEPROM of main control boards 16 and 116) for storing the other of the authentication information of the pair;
Authentication information specifying information (SID of main control unit or main control board) for specifying authentication information (SID and authentication key of CU communication control unit, or SID and authentication key of payout control unit) to be stored in the storage means SID) for authentication to the authentication information management device (I / O port 807 or I / O ports of the main control boards 16 and 116) for transmitting to the authentication information management device,
The authentication information management device stores authentication information in association with the authentication information specifying information (stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with the SID of the main control unit. (Or the SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key are stored in association with the SID of the main control board), and the authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information transmitted from the first control means is stored. Search and return the searched authentication information to the first control means (return the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control unit, or correspond to the SID of the main control board) Replies with the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit)
The storage means stores the authentication information returned from the authentication information management device (in the main control unit 323, the SID and authentication key of the returned CU communication control unit are stored in the EEPROM 808). Alternatively, the main control boards 16 and 116 store the returned SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in the EEPROM),
The first control unit and the second control unit perform cryptographic communication with each other using the authentication information when the communication partner control unit is authenticated using the authentication information. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information to be stored in the first control means communicably connected to the authentication information management apparatus is transmitted to the authentication information management apparatus. Authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information is retrieved by the authentication information management apparatus, and the retrieved authentication information is returned to the first control means, and the first control means returns the authentication information. By storing the authentication information, paired authentication information is stored in the second control unit with respect to the authentication information stored in advance in the second control unit. Mutual authentication can be performed between the two control means. Then, the authentication information to be stored in the first control means is not transmitted from the local area in which the authentication information is transmitted from the second control means. Since the authentication information is transmitted, the risk of leakage of the authentication information can be reduced as much as possible.

(2) In the gaming system according to (1), the second control unit includes a pair of authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information. (The SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in advance in the ROM 809 at the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 in FIG. The SID of the payout control unit is stored in advance)
In the first control means, the authentication information specifying information is stored at the manufacturing stage of the gaming machine (the SID of the main control unit is stored in the EEPROM 808 at the manufacturing stage of the CU, or P units, The SID of the main control board is stored in the EEPROM at the manufacturing stage of S units),
The authentication information specifying information transmitting means transmits the stored authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management apparatus (the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323 is set to I / O). It is transmitted from the O port 807 to the key management server 800. Alternatively, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control boards 16, 116 is transmitted from the I / O port of the main control boards 16, 116 to the key management server 803. It may be configured as follows.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means side stores the authentication information for a pair corresponding to the authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information at the manufacturing stage of the second control means. On the other hand, the first control means side transmits the authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management device to store the authentication information returned from the authentication information management device. Compared to the case where the first control means and the second control means in which the authentication information is stored in the manufacturing stage and the paired authentication information is stored in the gaming machine are also assembled in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty in assembling work that both control means in which authentication information for a pair of pairs is stored must be assembled without error, and authentication information that is not paired is stored. Both systems Can be prevented as much as possible a mistake on the assembling work arises in that the assembly means.

  (3) In the gaming system of (2) above, the first control means and the second control means authenticate each other as a result of mutual authentication using the authentication information. After being obtained, the authentication information may be used to perform cryptographic communication with each other (processing for communication using the session key in FIG. 25).

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means obtain mutual authentication using mutual authentication information, thereby obtaining mutual authentication. It is possible to confirm that the business information is correct information, and then perform proper encrypted communication in order to perform encrypted communication with each other using the correct authentication information.

(4) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) used in a game hall where gaming machines (pachinko machines 2, slot machines 2S) are installed,
An authentication information management apparatus (corresponding to the SID of the main control unit and the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit) storing the authentication information and authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information in association with each other A first control unit (main control unit 323) that is communicably connected to the stored key management server 800);
Second control means (CU communication control unit 80) communicably connected to the first control means,
The first control means and the second control means authenticate whether or not the communication counterpart control means is appropriate using the paired authentication information (the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 26). Single authentication sequence in FIG. 27),
One of the authentication information for the pair is stored in advance in the second control means (the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in advance in the ROM 809 in FIG. 7),
The first control means includes
Storage means (EEPROM 808) for storing the other of the pair authentication information;
Authentication information specifying information for transmitting the authentication information specifying information (SID of the main control unit) for specifying the authentication information (SID of the CU communication control unit) to be stored in the storage means to the authentication information management device Transmission means (I / O port 807),
The storage means stores the authentication information specified and sent back by specifying the authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information transmitted from the authentication information management apparatus (the main control unit 323 returns the response information). The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit that has been stored are stored in the EEPROM 808),
The first control unit and the second control unit perform cryptographic communication with each other using the authentication information when the communication partner control unit is authenticated using the authentication information. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information to be stored in the first control means communicably connected to the authentication information management apparatus is transmitted to the authentication information management apparatus. Authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information is retrieved by the authentication information management apparatus, and the retrieved authentication information is returned to the first control means, and the first control means returns the authentication information. By storing the authentication information, paired authentication information is stored in the second control unit with respect to the authentication information stored in advance in the second control unit. Mutual authentication can be performed between the two control means. Then, the authentication information to be stored in the first control means is not transmitted from the local area in which the authentication information is transmitted from the second control means. Since the authentication information is transmitted, the risk of leakage of the authentication information can be reduced as much as possible.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4), authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information is stored in the second control means at the manufacturing stage of the second control means. (The SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in advance in the ROM 809 during the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 in FIG. 7),
In the first control means, the authentication information specifying information is stored at the manufacturing stage of the gaming device (the SID of the main control unit is stored in the EEPROM 808 at the manufacturing stage of the CU),
The authentication information specifying information transmitting means transmits the stored authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management apparatus (the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323 is set to I / O). O-port 807 may be transmitted to key management server 800).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means side stores the authentication information for a pair corresponding to the authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information at the manufacturing stage of the second control means. On the other hand, the first control means side transmits the authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management device to store the authentication information returned from the authentication information management device. Compared to the case where the first control means and the second control means in which the authentication information is stored in the manufacturing stage and the paired authentication information is stored in the gaming machine are also assembled in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty in assembling work that both control means in which authentication information for a pair of pairs is stored must be assembled without error, and authentication information that is not paired is stored. Both systems Can be prevented as much as possible a mistake on the assembling work arises in that the assembly means.

  (6) In the gaming apparatus of (5), the first control means and the second control means authenticate each other as a result of mutual authentication using the authentication information. After being obtained, the authentication information may be used to perform cryptographic communication with each other (processing for communication using the session key in FIG. 25).

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means obtain mutual authentication using mutual authentication information, thereby obtaining mutual authentication. It is possible to confirm that the business information is correct information, and then perform proper encrypted communication in order to perform encrypted communication with each other using the correct authentication information.

(7) Still another aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game is performed by launching a game medium in a game area,
A first control unit (main control board 16) connected to the authentication information management apparatus that stores the authentication information and the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information in association with each other; ,
Second control means (payout control unit 17) connected to be communicable with the first control means,
The first control unit and the second control unit use a pair of authentication information (SID of the payout control unit, SID of the main control board, authentication key as a common key) to communicate with each other. Is authentic (device authentication sequence of FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence of FIG. 27),
One of the pair authentication information is stored in advance in the second control means (the SID of the payout control unit is stored in advance in the ROM of the payout control unit 17),
The first control means includes
Storage means (EEPROM of the main control board 16) for storing the other of the authentication information for the pair;
Authentication information for transmitting the authentication information specifying information (SID of the main control board) for specifying the authentication information (SID of the payout control unit, authentication key) to be stored in the storage means to the authentication information management device Specific information transmission means (I / O port of the main control board 16),
The storage means stores the authentication information returned by the authentication information management device specifying and returning the authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information (in the main control board 16, the payout that has been returned) The SID of the control unit and the authentication key are stored in the EEPROM),
The first control unit and the second control unit perform cryptographic communication with each other using the authentication information when the communication partner control unit is authenticated using the authentication information. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information to be stored in the first control means communicably connected to the authentication information management apparatus is transmitted to the authentication information management apparatus. Authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information is retrieved by the authentication information management apparatus, and the retrieved authentication information is returned to the first control means, and the first control means returns the authentication information. By storing the authentication information, paired authentication information is stored in the second control unit with respect to the authentication information stored in advance in the second control unit. Mutual authentication can be performed between the two control means. Then, the authentication information to be stored in the first control means is not transmitted from the local area in which the authentication information is transmitted from the second control means. Since the authentication information is transmitted, the risk of leakage of the authentication information can be reduced as much as possible.

(8) Still another aspect of the present invention includes a variable display device whose display state can be changed, and the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device Is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S) in which a winning can be generated when one game is completed by the derivation display, and the display result that is derivation display becomes a predetermined display result,
A first control unit (main control board 116) connected to the authentication information management apparatus that stores the authentication information and the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information in association with each other; ,
Second control means (payout control unit 117) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control unit and the second control unit use a pair of authentication information (SID of the payout control unit, SID of the main control board, authentication key as a common key) to communicate with each other. Is authentic (device authentication sequence of FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence of FIG. 27),
One of the pair authentication information is stored in advance in the second control means (the SID of the payout control unit is stored in advance in the ROM of the payout control unit 117),
The first control means includes
Storage means (EEPROM of the main control board 116) for storing the other of the authentication information of the pair;
Authentication information for transmitting the authentication information specifying information (SID of the main control board) for specifying the authentication information (SID of the payout control unit, authentication key) to be stored in the storage means to the authentication information management device Specific information transmission means (I / O port of the main control board 116),
The storage means stores the authentication information returned by the authentication information management device specifying the authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information (in the main control board 116, the payout that has been returned) The SID of the control unit and the authentication key are stored in the EEPROM),
The first control unit and the second control unit perform cryptographic communication with each other using the authentication information when the communication partner control unit is authenticated using the authentication information. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information to be stored in the first control means communicably connected to the authentication information management apparatus is transmitted to the authentication information management apparatus. Authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information is retrieved by the authentication information management apparatus, and the retrieved authentication information is returned to the first control means, and the first control means returns the authentication information. By storing the authentication information, paired authentication information is stored in the second control unit with respect to the authentication information stored in advance in the second control unit. Mutual authentication can be performed between the two control means. Then, the authentication information to be stored in the first control means is not transmitted from the local area in which the authentication information is transmitted from the second control means. Since the authentication information is transmitted, the risk of leakage of the authentication information can be reduced as much as possible.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (7) or (8), the second control means stores authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information at a manufacturing stage of the second control means. (The SID of the payout control unit is stored in advance in the ROM chip manufacturing stage of the payout control units 17 and 117),
In the first control means, the authentication information specifying information is stored at the manufacturing stage of the gaming machine device (the SID of the main control board is stored in the EEPROM at the manufacturing stage of the P and S units). And)
The authentication information specifying information transmitting means transmits the stored authentication information specifying information to the authentication information managing device (the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control boards 16 and 116). (The data may be transmitted from the I / O ports of the main control boards 16 and 116 to the key management server 803.).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means side stores the authentication information for a pair corresponding to the authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information at the manufacturing stage of the second control means. On the other hand, the first control means side transmits the authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management device to store the authentication information returned from the authentication information management device. Compared to the case where the first control means and the second control means in which the authentication information is stored in the manufacturing stage and the paired authentication information is stored in the gaming machine are also assembled in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty in assembling work that both control means in which authentication information for a pair of pairs is stored must be assembled without error, and authentication information that is not paired is stored. Both systems Can be prevented as much as possible a mistake on the assembling work arises in that the assembly means.

  (10) In the gaming machines of the above (7) to (9), the first control means and the second control means are appropriate as a result of mutual authentication using the authentication information. After obtaining the authentication, it may be configured to perform cryptographic communication with each other using the authentication information (a process of performing communication using the session key in FIG. 25).

According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means obtain mutual authentication using mutual authentication information, thereby obtaining mutual authentication. It is possible to confirm that the business information is correct information, and then perform proper encrypted communication in order to perform encrypted communication with each other using the correct authentication information.
(11) Still another aspect of the present invention is a gaming frame for a gaming machine in which a game medium is played by launching a gaming medium.
It is configured to be communicable with a first control means communicably connected to an authentication information management apparatus that stores authentication information and authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information in association with each other. Including second control means;
The first control means and the second control means authenticate whether or not the communication counterpart control means is appropriate using a pair of authentication information.
One of the authentication information for the pair is stored in advance in the second control means, and a storage means for storing the other of the authentication information for the pair in the first control means; Authentication information specifying information transmitting means for transmitting the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information to be stored in the storage means to the authentication information management device, and the storage means includes the authentication information The authentication information returned by the information management device identifying and returning the authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information is stored;
The second control means performs cryptographic communication with each other using the authentication information when it is authenticated that the communication partner control means is appropriate using the authentication information.
(12) In the gaming system according to any one of (1) to (3), the first control means and the second control means store pair identification information used for mutual authentication, Perform the authentication process using the identification information,
The authentication process includes
A challenge code is generated in the second control means and transmitted to the first control means, and a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the first control means. A first challenge response authentication process for returning to the second control means and determining the suitability of the response code received using the stored identification information in the second control means;
A challenge code is generated in the first control means and transmitted to the second control means, and a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the second control means. A second challenge response authentication process for returning to the first control means and determining in the first control means whether or not the response code received using the stored identification information is appropriate.
(13) In the gaming device according to any one of (4) to (6), the first control means and the second control means store pair identification information used for mutual authentication, Perform the authentication process using the identification information,
The authentication process includes
A challenge code is generated in the second control means and transmitted to the first control means, and a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the first control means. A first challenge response authentication process for returning to the second control means and determining the suitability of the response code received using the stored identification information in the second control means;
A challenge code is generated in the first control means and transmitted to the second control means, and a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the second control means. A second challenge response authentication process for returning to the first control means and determining in the first control means whether or not the response code received using the stored identification information is appropriate.
(14) In any one of the above gaming machines (7) to (10), the first control means and the second control means store pair identification information used for mutual authentication, and the identification Authenticate using the information,
The authentication process includes
A challenge code is generated in the second control means and transmitted to the first control means, and a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the first control means. A first challenge response authentication process for returning to the second control means and determining the suitability of the response code received using the stored identification information in the second control means;
A challenge code is generated in the first control means and transmitted to the second control means, and a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the second control means. A second challenge response authentication process for returning to the first control means and determining in the first control means whether or not the response code received using the stored identification information is appropriate.
(15) In the gaming frame of (11), the first control means and the second control means store pair identification information used for mutual authentication, and perform authentication processing using the identification information. Do,
The authentication process includes
A challenge code is generated in the second control means and transmitted to the first control means, and a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the first control means. A first challenge response authentication process for returning to the second control means and determining the suitability of the response code received using the stored identification information in the second control means;
A challenge code is generated in the first control means and transmitted to the second control means, and a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the second control means. A second challenge response authentication process for returning to the first control means and determining in the first control means whether or not the response code received using the stored identification information is appropriate.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is a figure which shows the whole system for delivering the information for authentication which consists of the authentication key for security ensuring, and unique ID (it is also mentioned SID). It is a figure which shows the content of the information for the control circuit of the main control part and CU communication control part, and memorize | stored. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process at the time of detecting abnormality as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an operation instruction. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of an operation response. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of an operation response. It is a figure which shows the meaning of various ball numbers, and a fixed point. (A) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of game machine state 1, (b) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of game machine state 2, (c) is each bit of game machine error state 1 FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of a communication status response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an apparatus information response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication disconnection is detected by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection by the pachinko machine side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the apparatus authentication sequence shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the process of the subroutine program of the single unit authentication sequence shown by FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of normality, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of abnormality. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a card unit and a pachinko machine are reconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of standby when the operation of the card unit and the pachinko machine is not performed. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of a replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of subtracting the number of game balls according to an instruction on the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the number of game balls in a pachinko machine runs out during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the lock | rock of the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the modification of the process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the cell (front frame) of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine is not connected when a power supply is started in the state where a card unit is holding a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation | movement instruction (no request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach | attain a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the operation response from a pachinko machine (response with respect to no request | requirement operation | movement) does not reach | attain a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction from a card unit (response to an addition request) does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to an addition request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from a card unit does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to a subtraction request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of addition refusal with respect to the addition request of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the subtraction rejection response with respect to the subtraction request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a rejection of a clear with respect to the clear instruction | indication request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of permission rejection with respect to the game permission request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of prohibition refusal with respect to the game prohibition request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of glass door opening rejection with respect to the glass door opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a cell (front frame) opening rejection with respect to the cell (front frame) opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when the power failure in the card unit after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure has occurred in the card unit before the operation instruction is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in a card unit before the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the addition request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the addition request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the subtraction request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the subtraction request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the clear request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the clear request. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed in conjunction with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share ball share) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the card was inserted. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share ball sharing) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the visitor card was inserted. It is a figure which shows the other example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball share process which carries out divided transfer (share ball share) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the member card was inserted. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a transition screen figure in FIG. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which shows another example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the control command output process of launching and lifting, (b) is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect. It is a front view which shows the card unit and the pachinko machine in another example.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a concept of terms used in the present embodiment, “gaming equipment” includes gaming machines (pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.), card units, Z counters, card issuing devices, clearing devices, hall management devices, prize exchanges. It is a concept that includes all devices installed in a game hall such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept that excludes only gaming machines from the “game device”.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, an enclosed circulating pachinko machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine” or “P”) 2, which is an example of a gaming machine, is attached to each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. A card unit (which may be abbreviated as CU hereinafter) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. A pachinko machine that accepts membership cards, which are recorded game recording media, and uses the game value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) possessed by the player specified by the record information of the cards. 2 has a function for allowing the ball to be fired and playing. The visitor card and membership card are composed of IC cards.

  This pachinko machine 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the hitting ball launch motor 18 (see FIG. 2) is driven to It is configured so that a game can be played one by one in the game area 27 on the front of the game board 26.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-type pachinko machine, which is not shown, but has a start port (1) and a start where a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can win a prize. And a variable display device that variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each of the start ports, and the display result of the variable display device is predetermined. A variable winning ball apparatus (also referred to as a big prize opening) or the like that is opened by a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance) is provided. The start port (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (for example, an open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) unfavorable to the player.

  When the variable winning ball apparatus is opened, a big hit state is achieved. In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening (1) and a large winning opening (2). For example, when a big win is generated based on a winning at the starting port (1), the big winning port (1) is in the first state, and when a big hit is generated based on a winning at the starting port (2), the big winning port (2) is the first state. Furthermore, the game area 2 is provided with four normal winning holes (1) to (4).

  The pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 145 (see FIG. 2) without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 145 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by the card reader / writer 327 (see FIG. 3), and information recorded on the card is read. In the protrusion 305 described above, the display 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card and the number of stored balls specified by the member ID are used for the surface facing the player when the member card is received. IR light receiving unit 315 (in FIG. 1) that receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for performing a replay game and a remote control (not shown) possessed by a game hall staff, converts the infrared signal into an electronic signal, and outputs it. (Not shown) is provided.

  Furthermore, a lending button 321, a return button 322, and a call button 798 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button operated to withdraw the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and use it in the game. The return button 322 is a button operated when returning the card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling a staff member of the game hall.

  The display 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information described later. In addition to being capable of being displayed, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, it is possible to play with a pachinko machine by deducting from the number of possessed balls. If the card is a membership card, the number of possessed balls is not recorded, and the stored ball is recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the game can be played by the pachinko machine 2 as it is withdrawn from the stored ball.

  The “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game hall. On the other hand, “the number of possession balls” is the number of game balls owned by a player as a result of a player playing a game with a gaming machine on a card, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of retained balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In the present embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly recorded on the member card, but is stored in the upper server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding stored ball can be searched based on the member card number. Has been. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344, and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  A display 54, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57 are provided below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 or FIGS. 68 to 85 to the player. The jog dial 57 selects and designates various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display unit 54 when the player rotates. Then, when the player rotates the jog dial 57, various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is operated by rotating the jog dial 57. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item that the player wants to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2. Here, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation pachinko ball will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. On the other hand, all winning balls won from a winning opening provided in the game area 27, a variable winning ball device, etc. are collected by the winning ball collecting cover member 144 and flow down the winning ball flow path 147. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 45 merges with the winning ball that flows down the winning ball flow-down path 147 and flows down the merge passing path 702. The joining passage path 702 is provided with a joining path detection switch 32, and a ball flowing down the joining passage path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul balls are discharged from the foul ball return port 150 and then detected by the foul ball detection switch 33. Thereafter, the foul balls enter the merging passage 702. The pachinko balls that have flowed down the merge passage path 702 are guided to the ball collection basket 189.

  The pachinko balls guided to the ball collection basket 89 are lifted by the lifting device 190. The lifting device 190 has a built-in lifting screw that is rotated by the lifting motor 40, and the pachinko ball is lifted by the rotation of the lifting screw. The back of the lifting device 190 is provided with polishing members 200a and 200b (200b is not visible in the drawing) for polishing the pachinko balls by contacting with the pachinko balls being transported. While being done, the surface is polished.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided on the ball inlet side (lower side) of the lifting device 190, and a ball raising switch (upper) 41a is provided on the ball discharge side (upper side). A pachinko ball to be transported is detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the ball raising switch (lower) 41b. The pachinko balls that have been lifted by the lifting device 190 and detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a are guided to the firing ball guiding path 153 and supplied from the driving ball outlet 49 to the ball feeding device (not shown). The ball feeding device has a function of feeding the next pachinko ball to the hitting ball launching position every time the player operates the hitting ball operating handle 25 to hit one pachinko ball. A pachinko ball fed by the ball feeding device is detected by a launch detection switch (not shown), and the launch detection signal is input to the payout controller 17 as will be described later.

  Further, game ball excess / deficiency detection switches 42a and 42b are provided in the middle of the circulation path of the pachinko balls (see FIG. 4) to detect whether or not the number of pachinko balls in the circulation path is a predetermined number (for example, 50). .

  Next, referring to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 5 and a glass door 6 with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 4 so that the left and right edges can be opened and closed. It has been.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front frame 5 opposite to the center of swinging. The engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the outer frame 4. When the front frame 5 in the open state is pressed against the outer frame 4, the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b get over the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b, and the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front frame opening solenoid 11 is provided on the rear surface side of the front frame 5. When the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited, a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b against the biasing force of the spring. Is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be unlocked, and the front frame 5 is released.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the glass door 6 portion facing the engagement projection 8. The engagement protrusion 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9 by pressing the opened glass door 6 against the front frame 5. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed down by the urging force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are engaged with each other to be locked. In this state, by energizing the glass door opening solenoid 10 provided on the back surface of the front frame 5, the engagement protrusion 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are pulled up. Is released and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame closing detector 13 is provided at a position in contact with the front frame 5 in the upper part of the outer frame 4, and it is detected that the front frame 5 is pressed against the outer frame 4 and is locked. Further, a glass door closing detector 12 is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6 in an upper portion of the front frame 5, and this glass door is that the glass door 6 is pressed against the front frame 5 to be in a locked state. Detected by the closure detector 12.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the control circuit of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2. Is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part 330 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part 20 to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts 330 and 20 are comprised by the connector etc., for example. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 20 and connection wiring. When the CPU 805 (see FIG. 7) of the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1, it sends an error display command to the display control unit 797 for display. The controller 312 displays an error and controls to turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 to cause an error to the display 312. Control is performed so that an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1.

  The above-described money discriminator 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the discrimination result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card. The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327. When the CPU 805 determines that the card is an improper card (forged card or the like), an error display command is displayed to the display control unit 797. To display the error on the display 312 and turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) and transmit a notification signal to the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred. .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and display data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the main control unit 323 to the display control unit 797. The display control unit 797 receives the output display data and controls the display 312 to display the display data. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323 via the display control unit 797.

  When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the call button 798, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 includes a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control section 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control section 34, a launch section 38, and an effect section 50. Is provided.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323, and the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 provided in the pachinko machine 2 are connected via the connector 330 and the connector 20. Electrically connected. The P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 are configured by a one-chip LSI 799. Then, as will be described later, various commands such as an addition request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P unit communication control unit 81. Various commands are transmitted from the P-unit communication control unit 81 to the payout control unit 17.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P-unit communication control unit 81, various kinds of game balls, addition balls, subtraction balls, start opening winning information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, error information A response is sent.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 16. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The payout control unit 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  In addition, the above-described joining path detection switch 32, foul ball detection switch 33, glass door opening solenoid 10, front frame opening solenoid 11, glass door closing detector 12, and front frame closing detector 13 are electrically connected to the dispensing control unit 17. Are provided in a connected state.

  The main control board 16 transmits a connection confirmation signal, a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, and manufacturer-specific jackpot information to the payout control unit 17.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout controller 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout controller 17. The payout control unit 17 controls the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control unit 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls. This will be described in detail later.

  The start opening prize information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize at either the start opening 1 or the start opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control unit 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control. Specific examples of the error include, for example, a timing sensor error that causes the game area 27 to bring a magnet close to the game area and guides the game ball to the prize opening, a radio wave sensor error that illegally turns on the winning ball detection switch by transmitting an illegal radio wave, and a variable prize There is an illegal winning error or the like in which a detection signal is output from a 10-count switch that detects a winning ball of the variable winning ball device when the ball device (attacker) is closed (see FIG. 16). When the CPU of the main control board 16 detects such an error or non-connection due to a connection confirmation signal, the CPU controls lighting or blinking of the calling lamp provided on the curtain plate and the I / O port of the main control board 16 An abnormality notification signal for notifying that the abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 is output from a not-shown (not shown).

  The symbol fixed number of times is information on the symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device with respect to winning at the start port 1 or the start port 2.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out-ball detection signal is input from the merging path detection switch 32 to the payout controller 17. The payout control unit 17 to which the out ball detection signal has been inputted subtracts and updates the number of balls in game (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control unit 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated.

  When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the excitation of the glass door opening solenoid 10, the glass door 6 is unlocked and opened as described with reference to FIG. When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the excitation of the front frame opening solenoid 11, the front frame 5 is unlocked and opened as described with reference to FIG.

  As described with reference to FIG. 3, by pressing the glass door 6 against the front frame 5 and closing it, a glass door closing detection signal is output from the glass door closing detector 12 and input to the dispensing control unit 17. As described with reference to FIG. 3, by pressing the front frame 5 against the outer frame 4 and closing it, a front frame closing detection signal is output from the front frame closing detector 13 and input to the payout control unit 17.

  The CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3 and the P unit communication control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected. From the CU communication control unit 80 to the payout control unit 17 via the P unit communication control unit 81. Various commands such as an addition request, a subtraction request, a game permission / inhibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted.

  As will be described later, the addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when a game ball is rented or replayed from the prepaid balance, and the payout control unit 17 adds the number of game balls in response thereto. Update. As will be described later, the subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when a split ball transfer (ball sharing process) or a wagon service is performed, and the payout control unit 17 receiving the command receives the number of game balls. Update the subtraction.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 17 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The addition request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be added to the game ball number by the above-described addition request command. The subtraction request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be subtracted from the game ball number by the above-described subtraction request command.

  Various responses of the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, start opening winning information, the number of symbols determined, jackpot information, and error information from the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P unit communication control unit 81 Is sent. The number of game balls is calculated by the payout control unit 17 based on various signals such as a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, out ball detection signal, and foul ball detection signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. This is the total number of game balls currently played. The number of balls to be added is the number of balls to be added to the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal, the start opening winning information, and the foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. It is. The number of subtracted balls is the number of subtracted balls subtracted from the number of game balls based on a firing detection signal transmitted from a game ball control unit 34 to be described later to the payout control unit 17. Each response of the start opening prize information, the number of symbol determinations, the jackpot information, and the error information is a response that designates the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 described above.

  The launch unit 38 of the game ball control unit is provided with a launch motor 18, a touch ring 35, a single launch switch 36, and a launch motor origin sensor 37. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 and outputting the signal (touch ring input signal). The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output when the touch ring input signal is input, and drives the firing motor 18. The single shot switch 36 is used for a player to perform an operation (single shot operation) for driving a pachinko ball into the game area 27 one by one. When the single shot operation is performed, the single shot switch 36 is used. A single fire switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 18 and outputs a detection signal thereof. Each time the firing motor 18 makes one revolution, the origin is detected and a signal is output.

  A touch ring signal and a single shot switch detection signal are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control board 31. Further, a launch detection signal indicating that the pachinko ball has been launched and a detection signal of the launch motor origin sensor are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control unit 17. Upon receiving the firing detection signal, the payout control unit 17 updates the number of subtracted balls and the number of in-game balls by 1 and updates the number of game balls by 1 with respect to the detection of one fired ball.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control unit 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27.

  As described with reference to FIG. 2, the lifting unit 39 provided in the game ball control unit 34 is provided with the lifting motor 40, the doffing switch (upper) 41a, and the doffing switch (lower) 41b. ing. Further, the transport unit 39 is provided with a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b). The gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switches 1 and 2 are switches for detecting whether or not the total number (for example, 50) of the pachinko balls enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 is excessive or insufficient.

  A lifting motor excitation output signal for exciting the lifting motor 40 is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 17 to the lifting unit 39. On the other hand, a signal for detection of lifting (passing / full tank) based on detection signals of the doffing switch (upper) 41a and the doffing switch (lower) 41b is transmitted from the lifting unit 39 to the payout control unit 17. , 50 replenishment detection signals are input as detection signals of the gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b).

  The effect section 50 includes a display effect control board 53, a display power supply board 51, a display power supply relay board 52, a display 54, a display ROM board 55, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. Is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Control is performed to read image data by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the ROM board 55 for the display device, to transmit the display data to the display device 54, and to display the display screen on the display device 54. To do. The button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 54. A display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 is displayed on the display 54.

  Electric power of a predetermined voltage from the display power supply board 51 is supplied to the display effect control board 53 via the display power supply relay board 52.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. This display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit operation command, and a test command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating a gaming state by the pachinko machine 2 such as the number of jackpot occurrences and the probability variation number, and the card unit operation command is a command when the player operates the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect unit 50.

  As the command from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after the transmission of the previous command. Then, the display effect control board 53 detects a line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite a lapse of a fixed time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted 10 times continuously, The effect control board 53 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the display 54 to display the lighting of the calling lamp and the error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, main data among various data stored on each of the CU side and the P base side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the current number of game balls is managed by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P side on the CU side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but the number of game balls is controlled so that when the number of game balls reaches 0 on the P table side, the P game player quickly stops hitting the ball. It is a secondary item used only for performing Since the main management of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the P table side, and the cost of the P game can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, compared with the CU, the P units have a short replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. For that reason, the running cost of the game hall where the enclosed game machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with a main management function related to the number of game balls on the P platform side to reduce the cost on the P platform side. There is an advantage.

  FIG. 5 shows the RAM storage data provided in the CU-side main control unit 323 and the RAM storage data mounted in the P-unit side payout control unit 17. First, when the power is turned on with the P units (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control unit 17 on the P unit side The main chip ID is transmitted from the main control board 16, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17 is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the CU side and the P base side are connected and the communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side, and the P connection side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P units as in the previous time are connected. The connection time data includes new connection time data transmitted from the CU side to the P base side when communication between the CU side and the P base side is started each time the power is turned on. Is stored on the P platform side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the P base side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by "1" and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P base side. The The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the P platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and the P platform in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in response to the operation instruction. When the SQN is received from the P unit, the CU rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the P units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and the next time the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated on the P platform.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 55 to 63 described later, when communication is interrupted during communication, SQN is backed up until communication is reconnected. Since the operation response is always transmitted regardless of the occurrence time of the error (see FIGS. 48 and 55 to 63), the SQN stored in the backup until the communication is reconnected is always the last SQN transmitted. It has become. On the other hand, since the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction is transmitted or an operation instruction is received according to the time of occurrence of communication disconnection (see FIGS. 48 and 55 to 63), the process until the communication is reconnected. The SQN stored during the backup is either the last transmitted or the last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the P platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the P platform side. Then, when the operation response is returned from the P platform side to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. Then, the sequence number of n + 2 is sent to the P platform side.

  Next, the current ball related information (the ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. This current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 wins and the additional ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the additional ball counter is used to calculate the additional ball number. Counting is performed, and the value of the added ball counter (the number of added balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. If a pachinko ball is fired into the game area 27 and the fired ball is detected by the fired ball detection switch, a subtraction ball counter counts the number of fired balls as a subtraction ball number based on the detection signal, and the subtraction. The value of the number of balls counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  Further, the pachinko ball has won the start opening (1) or the start opening (2), and the start opening (1) winning signal or the starting opening (2) winning signal has been transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control section 17. In this case, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of winnings with the starting port 1 winning number counter or the starting port 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P base side to the CU side. Further, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of game balls at the present time with the game ball number counter based on the number of added balls and the number of subtraction balls, and the count value of the game ball number counter is changed from the P side to the CU side. Send to.

  On the P side, each time the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port (1) winning counter, starting port (2) winning counter, and game ball counter are transmitted to the CU side, they are counted. After the value is stored (rewritten) as backup data in the previous ball related information storage area, the value of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter and starting port 2 winning counter as current ball related information Clear 0. In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous ball related information (current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings at the start opening 1 And the data of the number of start-up 2 winnings is stored as backup data. When the current ball related information is not transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side, this backup data includes not only the current counter value but also the previous counter value that was not transmitted at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), the starting port (1) the total number of winning prizes (starting port (1) The total number of times), the start opening (2) the total number of winnings (start opening (2) total number of times), and the number of game balls are stored.

  The total number of added balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the added ball number counter (number of added balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Also, the total number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Further, the starting port (1) total winning number is updated based on the value of the starting port 1 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit, and the value of the starting port 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side is updated. Based on the starting opening (2), the total number of winnings is updated. In this way, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P cars. Similarly, the CU updates the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, the starting port (1), (2) the total number of winnings by updating the current ball related information transmitted from the P unit one by one. Information can be managed.

  As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 and 15, the breakdown of the “number of added balls” is game ball acquired number information and back ball added information. The back ball is a foul ball. The “subtracted ball count” is also referred to as game ball shot count information.

  The CU receives the count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball count or game ball total count information) in addition to the value of the addition ball counter and the subtraction ball counter from the P side. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball counter sent from the P platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P side does not match the number of game balls managed on the CU side, the number of game balls on the CU side is sent from the P side. It is never updated with the number of balls.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side with the current number of game balls updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to the error state, the CU performs recovery processing, transmits a communication start request command to the P units, and uses the data correction request Bit1 data included in the command to determine the number of P game balls ( Processing to correct the game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed. As the correction process, correction is made to the number of game balls managed on the CU side. Instead, the number of game balls managed on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side are stored. You may correct | amend to the average value with the number of balls.

  Further, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error notification is given by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, hall management). An error notification by the computer 1 may be performed), or a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member may be performed.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of the various counters transmitted from the P platform side, and calculates and manages the current number of game balls based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter in particular. Has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the P platform. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P side for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, a game ball counter for storing the number of game balls on the P platform side may not be provided.

  The CU performs a game ball number matching determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated number of game balls at the present time with the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side. And a function of performing control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P platform side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU side, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. The number of balls may be received and it may be determined whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a holding ball (a stored ball) and a storage area for storing a card balance of an accepted (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU receives an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of a replay button (also referred to as a replay button) 319 (see FIG. 4) provided on the CU)). In response, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own game value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the amount of the deducted ball The addition request ball number for adding the number to the game ball counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P stand side. On the P side, in response to this, the game ball number counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation for ordering a so-called wagon service in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink is executed, the number of balls required for subtraction of the player-owned game value is To the P platform side. On the P platform side, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an overall system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key and SID (also referred to as a unique ID) for ensuring security.

  In the amusement hall, a host server 801, a card unit 3, and a pachinko machine 2 are installed. The card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 perform encryption communication with each other. The card unit 3 and the upper server 801 are also performing encrypted communication with each other. Further, encryption communication is also performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 provided in the card unit 3. Further, cryptographic communication is also performed between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 in the LSI 799 configured with one chip provided in the pachinko machine 2 and between the main control board 16 and the key management server 803. Yes. Further, intra-chip communication is performed between the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17.

  The host server 801 is a server designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the card unit 3, and has a function of managing sales in the case where a player inserts a card into the card unit 3 and plays a game using, for example, a prepaid balance. have. A key management server 800 that can communicate with the host server 801 is installed outside the game hall. This key management server 800 is also designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the card unit 3.

  A key management server 803 that can communicate with the main control board 16 is installed outside the game hall. This key management server 803 is designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 2.

  The CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 store a dedicated program common to each company regardless of the card unit manufacturer or the pachinko machine manufacturer, and the communication control is performed according to the program. As a result, the specifications of the communication interface between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 in order to enable communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 in any card unit manufacturer. Is open to each card unit manufacturer. Except between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, the specification of the communication interface is not disclosed. On the other hand, in the case of communication between the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, both are provided in the one-chip microcomputer and communication is performed within the chip. Need not be published.

  Key management server 800 and host server 801, host server 801 and main control unit 323, main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 and P unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17 and main control board 16 and the main control board 16 and the key management server 803 mutually authenticate using the authentication information, and determine whether or not the counterpart devices are appropriate. Then, communication is performed with each other on the condition that an authentication result that is appropriate is obtained. Distribution of authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.

  First, referring to FIG. 7, the main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 805 as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 804 storing a control program and data, and a work area for the CPU 805. A functioning RAM (Random Access Memory) 806, an I / O port 807, and an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable PROM) 808 are provided.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 is also provided with a CPU 810 as a control center, a ROM 809 that stores control programs and data, a RAM 811 that functions as a work area for the CPU 810, an I / O port 812, and an EEPROM 813. .

  The main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 communicate with each other through the I / O ports 807 and 812. Although not shown in FIG. 7, the I / O port 807 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the upper server 801. The I / O port 812 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the P-unit communication control unit 81.

  In the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID (unique ID) of the CU communication control unit is stored. There are two types of mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80: authentication using this SID and authentication using an authentication key (common key) described later. As will be described in detail later, authentication using SID is performed by storing each other's own SID and the other party's SID and determining whether or not each other stores the correct SID by a challenge response method described later. It is. As will be described later, in the authentication using the authentication key, an authentication key composed of a common key is stored, and whether or not the stored authentication keys match each other is authenticated.

  As described above, the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 stores the SID of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage. Therefore, the main control unit 323 also needs to store both its own SID and the other party, that is, the CU communication control unit SID stored in the CU communication control unit 80.

  Then, at the manufacturing stage of CU3, the SID of the main control unit and the authentication key (common key) are written in the EEPROM 813 by the ROM writer or the like, and the SID of the main control unit is written in the EEPROM 808.

  In the case of mutual authentication by SID, it is necessary to store the SID of the other party and one's own, and also in the case of mutual authentication using an authentication key consisting of a common key, It is necessary to keep. However, at the stage where the CU is manufactured, the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are not stored in the main control unit 323. The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are transmitted from the key management server 800 in FIG. 6 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808. Specifically, referring to FIG. 6, key management server 800 stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each SID of the main control unit. As described above, the card unit manufacturer stores the SID of the main control unit in the EEPROM 808 in the manufacturing stage of the card unit 3, and the SID of the CU communication control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control unit, that is, already stored in the ROM 809. The SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 are transmitted to the key management server 800 together with the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808. Then, the key management server 800 receives it, and stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit transmitted in association with the transmitted SID of the main control unit. In this way, the key management server 800 constructs a database of authentication information for a pair consisting of the SID of the main control unit, the SID of the CU communication control unit corresponding thereto, and the authentication key that is a common key.

  As described above, the SID of the main control unit itself is authentication information, but is transmitted to the key management server 800 to identify the corresponding CU communication control unit SID and authentication key in the key management server 800. It is also used for authentication information identification information.

  When the card unit 3 is first turned on after the card unit 3 is installed in the amusement hall, the main control unit 323 manages the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 via the host server 801 and manages the key. Send to server 800. The key management server 800 searches for the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in association with the received SID of the main control unit 323, and searches for the SID and authentication of the searched CU communication control unit 80. The key is returned to the main control unit 323 via the host server 801. The main control unit 323 receives this, and stores the received SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 in the EEPROM 808. As a result, the same SID (pair) as the SID of the CU communication control unit 8 stored in the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the EEPROM 808 and the same as the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 (pair). An authentication key is stored in EEPROM 808.

  Whether the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the ROM 809 is correct between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the EEPROM 808 Is used to determine whether the CU communication control unit 80 is appropriate or not, and the main control stored in the EEPROM 808 using the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 Unit authentication is performed to determine whether the SID of the unit 323 is correct and to determine whether the main control unit 323 is correct. Further, whether or not a common authentication key is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is determined by using an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 and an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. Device authentication is performed by using and determining. These single authentication and device authentication will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the reason why the key management server 800 is used as the distribution source for distributing the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80, which is a part of the authentication information, to the main control unit 323 will be described.

  For example, referring to FIG. 7, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 804 in the main control unit 323 as well as the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 809 at the time of chip manufacture. In this case, the memory chip storing the SID of the same CU communication control unit 80 must be mounted on both the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. A memory chip must be mounted, which causes a disadvantage that the mounting process becomes complicated.

  Therefore, for example, one of the pair authentication information, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID of the main control unit 323, and the authentication key are stored in the CU communication control unit 80, and the card unit 3 is manufactured. At the time of installation or when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, one authentication information stored in the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted to the main control unit 323. A method of storing the transmitted authentication information, that is, the SID of the main control unit, the SID of the CU communication control unit, and the authentication key by using the EEPROM 808 can be considered.

  However, in the case of this method, the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, so that there is a risk of leakage of the authentication information during that time, resulting in a security problem. In particular, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, as described above, the communication interface specification is disclosed, and the authentication information is transmitted according to the disclosed communication interface specification. Accordingly, there is a disadvantage that the risk of leakage of authentication information increases. Moreover, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 are devices located in a local area as compared with, for example, the upper server 801 and the key management server 800, and the number thereof is also higher than that of the upper server 801 and the key management server 800. For this reason, there is a possibility that a person who attempts fraud easily allows an unauthorized person to intercept and eavesdrop on authentication information.

  Further, when the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, the following inconvenience occurs. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 is replaced with an illegally manufactured CU communication control unit 80, and then the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 stores the authentication information. In the case where an illegal act is performed, in the mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, it is not determined that there is any abnormality, and the CU communication control unit 80 is illegal. Can not be found. In other words, in the case of a system in which authentication information is supplied from one side that performs mutual authentication to the other side that performs mutual authentication, one side that performs mutual authentication is replaced with an unauthorized one, and then the fraudulent act is performed by supplying authentication information. This creates a security hole that allows you to forgive.

  In order to prevent the above inconveniences, a download method is adopted in which the authentication information stored in the upper server 801 is downloaded and stored in the main control unit 323.

  Also, for the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 in the pachinko machine 2, the authentication information stored in the key management server 803 is downloaded as described above. Then, a download method of storing in the main control board 16 is adopted.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the ROM chip manufacturing stage of the payout control unit 17, the SID of the payout control unit 17 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is used by a ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured. And the authentication key are written in the EEPROM of the payout control unit 17, and the SID of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 by a ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured.

  In this state, when the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 2 is installed in the game hall, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 is read from the I / O port of the main control board 16. Transmit to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in association with the SID of each main control board in a plurality of pachinko machines. The key management server 803 searches for the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 16, and uses the searched SID and authentication key of the payout control unit. It returns to the main control board 16. The main control board 16 stores the returned SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in the EEPROM.

  Further, in the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 117 in the slot machine 2S (FIGS. 88 to 90), which will be described later, the key management server 803 stores the authentication information as described above. A download method is employed in which the stored authentication information is downloaded and stored in the main control board 116.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the ROM chip manufacturing stage of the payout control unit 117, the SID of the payout control unit 117 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is read by a ROM writer or the like when the slot machine is manufactured. The SID and the authentication key are written into the EEPROM of the payout control unit 117, and the SID of the main control board is written into the EEPROM of the main control board 116 by a ROM writer or the like when the slot machine is manufactured.

  In this state, when the power is turned on for the first time after the slot machine 2S is installed in the amusement hall, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 116 is read from the I / O port of the main control board 116. Transmit to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in association with the SID of each main control board in the plurality of slot machines. The key management server 803 searches for the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 116, and uses the searched SID and authentication key of the payout control unit. It returns to the main control board 116. The main control board 116 stores the returned SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in the EEPROM.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 8, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, P-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17, or main control board 16, it is indicated by an arrow in FIG. Notification is made. The abnormality mentioned here is that the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the P-unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 17, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, noise, etc. This includes a case where a malfunction occurs or a failure occurs due to the above, or an offline state due to disconnection or the like.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above. Detect. This mutual authentication includes device authentication (see FIG. 25) using a session key, which will be described later, in addition to the aforementioned single authentication and device authentication. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. Then, the display control unit 797 is controlled to display that the display 312 indicates that an abnormality has occurred, and an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked to notify the abnormality. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit 324 to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the P-unit communication control unit 81. When the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 further notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 16 outputs a signal for turning on or blinking an abnormality notification lamp provided on the film plate or the like, and a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Send.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and sends a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that to the P unit communication control unit. 81 is notified. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 17 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the fact, and the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 of the fact.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the P unit communication control unit 81 to that effect. To the main control unit 323, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The P-unit communication control unit 81 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 notifies that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the fact is detected by the CU communication control unit 80, and the main control unit 323 is notified that the abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 notifies the abnormality notification described above. In addition to performing control, the host server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the fact that the payout control unit 17 has detected an abnormality is detected and the fact that the abnormality has occurred is mainly described. Notify the control board 16. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs the above-described abnormality notification control.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout controller 17, the main control board 16 detects the abnormality and performs the above-described abnormality occurrence control. If an abnormality has occurred in the payout control unit 17 and no abnormality has occurred in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and indicates that the abnormality has occurred. Notify the controller 80. Upon receiving the notification, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the above-described control for abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects the occurrence of the abnormality.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 detects the abnormality and notifies the P-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that an abnormality has occurred, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives the notification and notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. . In response to this, the main control unit 323 controls the above-described abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, the LSI 799 detects and notifies the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, and detects the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16. The CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Similarly to the above-described CU communication control unit 80, this LSI 799 also does not perform control for abnormality notification even if notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred when it is detected that abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The CU communication control unit 80 and the LSIs 799 and 999 are not connected to abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Not.

  In the control of FIGS. 6 to 8 described above, the pachinko machine 2 is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but a slot machine 2S described later may be used as an example of the gaming machine.

  Next, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 shows a transmission direction, names of transmission information, and an outline thereof. Data from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit is a command in the transmission direction, and data from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit is a response in the transmission direction.

  A recovery request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The command is transmitted to the payout control unit via the P unit communication control unit. This data transmission direction may be expressed as CU → P units. Thus, the command transmitted to the CU communication control unit is transmitted to the P units, and the description of this description will be omitted below. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to the P units.

  A response of the recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This response is transmitted from the payout control unit via the P-unit communication control unit. This data transmission direction may be expressed as P units → CU. Thus, the response transmitted to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the P units, and the repetition of this description will be omitted below. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by the P units to the CU. A connection confirmation request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This connection confirmation request command notifies P devices that they are in a connected state.

  A response of the connection confirmation response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of the connection confirmation response notifies the CU that it is in a connected state. A notification start request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This notification start request command requests the P units to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time).

  A response of a communication start response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This response to the communication start response notifies the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The operation instruction command instructs various types (game operations) to the P units and requests transmission of game table information (addition / subtraction data or the like). The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of the game machine.

  The response of the operation response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this operation response is to notify the execution result of the game operation instruction and the game table information (addition / subtraction data etc.) to the CU.

  A command (communication disconnection request command) requesting disconnection of the communication connection is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. A response indicating that the communication disconnection request command has been received is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command requesting an authentication result with the P-unit communication control unit (P-unit communication control unit authentication result request) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. As described with reference to FIG. 6, mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P stand communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (P unit communication control unit authentication result response) for notifying the authentication result with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether or not the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying the communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response in which the CU communication control unit determines whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and returns the determination result to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (time response) that is a notification that a time notification command has been received is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request 1) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one. The same applies to device authentication request 2 and unit authentication requests 1 to 4 described later.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one. The same applies to the device authentication response 2 and the unit authentication responses 1 to 4 described later.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying the second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (unit authentication request 1) for requesting unit authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This single authentication request will be described in detail later.

  A response (single authentication response 1) for notifying the single authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A command (single unit authentication request 2) for requesting the second unit authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (single authentication response 2) for notifying the second single authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. These single authentication requests and single authentication responses are transmitted and received as shown in FIG. 10 for the third single authentication request 3, the third single authentication response 3, the fourth single authentication request 4, and the fourth single authentication response 4. Is done.

  Next, the contents of the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, and the operation response among the commands / responses illustrated in FIG. 9 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Referring to FIG. 11, a response of the recovery response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (also referred to as recovery data) held by the P units to the CU. This “recovery information” refers to the data stored in the backup storage so that when the CU sends a recovery request command to the P units as the recovery process is executed, the P units send a recovery response to the CU. That is. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the recovery information transmitted from the P platform to the CU includes the connection time, the last sequence number, the previous ball related information, and the current ball related information.

  The column of “encryption” shown in FIG. 11 and after is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted. The symbol “X” indicates that the data is not encrypted and the symbol “◯” indicates that it is encrypted. The key used for this encryption uses a session key (also called a telegram key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is a connection time (connection time data received from the CU at the start of communication) backed up by the P units. The final sequence number is the sequence number that was backed up by P units. The last ball related information is the ball related information notified last time. Specifically, the game ball acquisition number information notified last time, the back ball addition information notified last time, the game ball firing number information notified last time, the symbol determination number 1 notified last time, the symbol determination number 2 notified last time, the previous notification The number of times of the starting port, the number of times of the starting port notified twice last time, the number of times of the first prize winning port notified last time, the number of times of the second time winning big winning port, and the number of times of winning ports 1 to 4 notified last time.

  “Game ball acquired number information” is information on the number of balls to be added to a game ball by winning. The “back ball addition information” is addition information for adding the foul ball detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 (see FIG. 2) to the game ball. The “game ball firing number information” is information on the number of pachinko balls launched by the launch unit 38 (see FIG. 4).

  In the flowcharts of FIGS. 5 and 21 to 67, “game ball acquisition number information” and “back ball addition information” are collectively referred to as “addition ball number”. Further, “game ball firing number information” is expressed as “subtraction ball number”.

  The “symbol determined number of times 1” is the number of times the symbol is determined by the variable display device 1. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is the number of times the symbol is determined by the variable display device 2.

  “Starting port number 1” is the number of pachinko ball winnings to the starting port 1. “Starting port number 2” refers to the number of times a pachinko ball is awarded to the starting port 2.

“The number of times of the grand prize opening 1” is the number of times the grand prize opening 1 is opened (number of rounds).
“The number of times of winning the prize winning opening 2” is the number of times of opening the winning opening 2 (number of rounds).

  “The number of winning holes 1 to 4” is the number of times that a pachinko ball is awarded to each of the winning holes 1 to 4.

  Further, as information on the recovery response transmitted from the P platform to the CU, there is current ball related information as the latest ball related information. Specifically, the current ball related information is information on the total number of game balls currently held by P units (also referred to as the number of game balls), information on the number of acquired game balls currently held by P units, and currently P units. Back ball addition information that is held, information on the number of game balls that are currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, current 1 start opening held by P stand, 2 start openings currently held by P stand, 1 big winning opening currently held by P stand, 1 prize opening currently held by P stand 2 times, the number of winning openings 1 to 4 currently held on the P platform.

  Note that the information marked with * in FIG. 11 is data to be backed up by P units, and ALL0 is set at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indefinite.

  FIG. 17 shows the meanings of various balls and the determination points in (Note 1) shown in FIG. The meaning of the number of balls and the contents of the confirmation points are as shown in FIG. 17, but a supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. Note that the CU checks whether the number of game balls of the P units matches the number of game balls after the correction of the CU. If they do not match, the CU sends a communication disconnection request command to the P units. The communication is disconnected and P games are stopped (see FIG. 48, etc.). Then, the CU executes the recovery process and sends a communication start request to the P machines (see FIG. 29), and in response to the data correction request included in the communication start request command, the game ball correction request is sent to the P machines. The P game balls are corrected to the number of game balls after being corrected on the CU side.

  The symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are symbol determination information for the winning of the pachinko ball to the starting port 1 and the starting port 2, respectively. The CU is used to count the number of times the game table (P units) starts. Is used.

  The number of start ports 1 and the number of start ports 2 are the number of times that the pachinko balls have won the P start ports 1 and 2 and the CU uses this data for checking the operating state of the game machine.

  The grand prize opening 1 and the big prize opening 2 are the number of times that the pachinko ball has won the P prize winning opening 1 and the big winning prize opening 2 (number), and the CU is the operating state of the game machine (P machine). Use this data for checking.

  The winning opening 1 to the winning opening 4 are the number (number) of the pachinko balls won in the P normal winning openings 1 to 4, and the CU uses this data for checking the operating state of the game machine.

  Referring to FIG. 13, the communication start request command transmitted from the CU to the P machine requests the P machine to correct the game ball and sequence number and to back up the new communication ID (communication start time). .

  Specific data of this communication start request includes connection time, data correction request, sequence number, and game ball data, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The connection time is the time when communication between the CU and the P unit is started, and is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P unit. This connection time is used as a communication connection ID.

  The data correction request is a request from the CU to correct data to the P units, and is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a clear request. When it is “0”, there is no clear request, and when it is “1”, clear request is designated. When there is a clear request, a request for clearing the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls”, etc. to the P units is made.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a sequence number correction request. When it is “0”, there is no sequence number correction request, and when it is “1”, the sequence number correction request is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a game ball correction request. When it is “0”, it indicates that there is a game ball correction request, and when it is “1”, it indicates that there is no game ball correction request.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 21 and subsequent figures, when the bit specifying the presence / absence of a request is “0”, it is expressed as “no request”, and when the bit is “1”, it is expressed as “present request”. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when “0”, “clear request not present”. In addition, as shown in parentheses in the data correction request column, “clear request” is “recovery clear”, “sequence number correction request” is “SQN correction”, and “game ball correction request” is “game ball correction”. ".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is a sequence number stored in the CU. The game balls are the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  The CU backs up the connection time and backs up the “main chip ID” and the “payout chip ID” when transmitting the communication start request command.

The P units perform the following processing when receiving this communication start request.
When the clear request is ON, the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls” is cleared to zero.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the notified sequence number is overwritten with the sequence number held by the P units.

  When the game ball correction request is ON, the notified game balls are overwritten with the game balls held by the P units.

Back up the connection time.
In addition, each process performed with the said P units is performed in an order from the top.

  The operation instruction commands transmitted from the CU to the P unit shown in FIG. 14 are “addition of game balls”, “subtraction of game balls”, “game permission / prohibition”, “game balls and sequence numbers”. "Clear" operation is instructed, and transmission of various game machine information is requested. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units.

  As an operation request, 8-bit data of Bit0 to Bit7 is transmitted from the CU to the P units. With respect to Bit 0, a game ball number addition request is instructed when “1”, and a game ball number addition non-request is instructed when “0”. For Bit1, “1” indicates that there is a game ball number subtraction request, and “0” indicates that there is no game ball subtraction request. As for Bit2, “1” indicates that a game permission is requested, and “0” indicates that no game permission is requested.

  For Bit 3, “1” indicates that there is a game prohibition request, and “0” indicates that there is no game prohibition request. With regard to Bit 4, when the number is "1", the presence of a clear request for the number of game balls and the sequence number is instructed, and when the bit is "0", the request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is instructed.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door opening request, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) opening request. Bit 7 is provided as a spare.

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 14, the “game ball number addition request” is also simply referred to as “addition”, the “game ball number subtraction request” is also simply referred to as “subtraction”, and the “game prohibition request” is It is also simply referred to as “prohibition request”, “game ball number and sequence number clear request” is also simply referred to as “clear request”, and “glass door open request” is also simply referred to as “glass open request”.

  When a plurality of bits of Bit0 to Bit7 are “1”, the P units execute in order from Bit0.

  The state of the CU corresponding to each bit base of the operation request is that the card is being held when Bit 0 is “1”, the card insertion process is being performed when Bit 1 is “1”, and Bit 2 is “1”. In some cases, addition is being displayed, subtraction is being displayed when Bit 3 is “1”, and clear display is being performed when Bit 4 is “1”.

  Also, data of the number of balls required for addition that is valid only when the operation request Bit 0 is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This data on the number of balls requested for addition indicates a value to be added to the number of game balls.

  Data of the number of balls required for subtraction that is valid only when Bit 1 of the operation request is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This subtraction request ball number data indicates a value to be subtracted from the game ball number.

  Referring to FIG. 15, the response of the operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of the operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and the game table information such as the number of game balls.

  As an execution result, it is transmitted from P units to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit0 to Bit6. For Bit0, when “1”, an execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the addition of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. Regarding Bit1, when “1”, the execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the subtraction of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. As for Bit2, when “1”, the execution result of the game permission rejection is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the game permission is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition rejection is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, when “1”, the number of game balls and sequence number clear rejection result are shown, and when “0”, the execution result that game ball number and sequence number clear are not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is rejected is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 6, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the cell release has been rejected is indicated, and when “6”, an execution result indicating that the cell release is not rejected is indicated.

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 15, “game ball number addition refusal” is also simply referred to as “addition refusal”, “game ball number subtraction refusal” is also simply referred to as “subtraction refusal”, and “game permission refusal” Is simply referred to as “denial of permission”, “denial of game prohibition” is also simply referred to as “prohibition of denial”, “clearance of number of game balls and sequence number” is also simply referred to as “clear denial”, and “glass door open denial” Is simply referred to as “refusal to open glass”.

  The “game ball total number information” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls obtained as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “game ball acquisition number information” is the number of acquired game balls, and is the total number information when there are a plurality of winnings at the time of transmission.

  “Back ball addition information” is the number of back balls (foul balls) when fired by the launch unit 38 (see FIG. 4). Information. The “game ball firing number information” is the number of balls fired by the launching unit 38 (see FIG. 4). If there are a plurality of balls fired at the time of transmission, the information is the total number. The “symbol determination number of times 1” is symbol determination information for winning of the start port 1, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is symbol determination information for winning at the start port 2, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped.

  The CU performs a game ball correction process using “game ball acquisition number information”, “back ball addition information”, and “game ball firing number information”. Specifically, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back ball addition information−game ball firing number information is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of game balls (total number of game balls). Then, it is checked whether or not the total number of game balls transmitted from the P units matches the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information). If they do not match, recovery processing is performed. A communication start request command is transmitted to the P units, and the data correction request data (Bit2 is “1” data) included in the command and the number of game balls stored in the CU are stored in the P units. Processing for correcting the number of game balls (game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed.

  Bits 0 to 3 are prepared as gaming machine error status 2, but this is provided as a reserve, and is used to deal with manufacturer-specific error information that is not used to specify the actual error status. Is.

  FIG. 18A shows details of each bit in the gaming machine state 1 in (Note 2) shown in FIG. Supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game table state 1 indicates whether or not the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P device that has received an instruction by the command from the CU is instructed. Transition to the state. Further, when a communication abnormality occurs, the P cars transition to the game prohibition state.

  During standby / game in Bit1, it is data indicating whether or not the fan (player) is playing (launching a ball), and the state where the fan (player) is not firing a ball is waiting The state in which a fan (player) is firing a ball is playing. The completion of the game of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the launch of the ball is stopped in the P platform, and then all the pachinko balls that have been thrown into the game area 27 are collected and the whereabouts of all the launched balls is confirmed It is.

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P machines), and is set to “1” for 30 seconds after the P machines are activated.

  FIG. 18B shows details of each bit in the gaming machine state 2 shown in (Note 3) of FIG. A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” during the big hit and during the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” during the big hit, during the small hit and during the high base. For the big hit 3 of Bit 2, “1” is set during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base).

  The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to “1” during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base) and during the high base. The high base of Bit4 is set to “1” during the high base.

  The gaming table error state 1 is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7, and details of each bit are shown in Note 4 of FIG. 18 (c). Bit0 is a bit indicating whether or not the frame body (front frame 5), that is, the cell is being opened, and is set to “1” when the cell is being opened. Bit 1 is a bit indicating whether or not the glass plate, that is, the glass door 6 is being opened. “1” is set when the glass plate (glass door) is being opened. Bit2 is set to “1” when a magnetic sensor error is detected when the magnetic sensor detects an illegal occurrence of bringing a magnet close to a game area or the like. After “1” is set, Bit 2 is set to “0” by turning on / off power of the P units.

  Bit3 is set to “1” when an illegal winning of a pachinko ball is detected. Then, the power is restored by turning on / off the power of P units, and Bit4 becomes “0”.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3 indicate that a gaming machine error 1 is occurring, a gaming machine error 2 is occurring, a gaming machine error 3 is occurring, a gaming machine error 4 occurrences are indicated.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this communication status response is indicated by a hexadecimal string, and 0x00 indicates that the communication status is OK (appropriate). In other cases, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, and 0x10, it is indicated that the abnormality is shown in FIG. In FIG. 19, CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, abnormal. MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted is decrypted and becomes abnormal as a result of not being proper data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not normal. The disconnection detection means an abnormality in which occurrence of disconnection between the P platform and the CU is detected.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a response of a device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The device information notified to the main control unit includes a main CPU chip ID, a main CPU chip maker code, a main CPU chip model code, a payout CPU chip maker code, and a payout CPU chip type code.

  Referring to FIG. 20, a response of the device information response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information on the main chip ID and the payout chip ID to the CU. The main chip ID is the chip ID recorded on the P main control boards 16, and the payout chip ID is the P payout chip IDs stored in the payout control unit 17. .

  Next, processing executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU and processing executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control unit 17 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 21, the mode of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU and the P platform will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. After receiving the response, the CU transmits the next command to the P units, and the P unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. As shown in FIG. 21, the period from the transmission of the first command to the P units from the CU to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of a response from the P platform to the CU until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU and the P platform at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, in the P platform, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, the response of the motion response for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls is sequentially transmitted from the P platform to the CU at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P units can finely notify the CU of the amount of change in the number of game balls. On the other hand, the CU can manage the points by finely reflecting the changes in the points on the P platform side.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be set as the P emission time intervals. It is also possible to match.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a process when a communication disconnection is detected on the CU side will be described. If the response is not received within one second after the CU sends a command to the P machine, the same command is sent to the P machine again. If no response is received within one second, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to P devices. If no response is received from the P units within one second after the second retransmission, the CU determines that there is a communication abnormality at this stage. This communication abnormality may be caused by the disconnection of the connector 330 or 20 shown in FIG. 4 or the disconnection of the connection wiring or the power supply of the P units.

  The CU transmits a device information request command to the P devices in order to start the connection sequence again after 5 seconds after determining the communication abnormality. The specific contents of the processing for transmitting the device information request command to the P devices and starting the connection sequence will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, processing when a communication disconnection is detected on the P platform side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the P machine, and the P machine sends a response to the CU in response to the command. Next, when the state in which the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units continues for 4 seconds, the P unit determines that the communication is interrupted and stops the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 to prohibit the game. At the same time, the state transits to an unconnected state. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector 330 or 20, the disconnection of the connection wiring, the power supply disconnection of the CU, etc., as described with reference to FIG.

  Next, referring to FIG. 24, the processing of the connection sequence at the time of power activation will be described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 24 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P unit is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU is turned off while the card is not inserted (see FIG. 30). A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, at the time of power-on, communication is started after stopping the hitting motor 18 to stop the game in the P platform. In the CU, an authentication sequence process is first executed. Specific control contents of the authentication sequence processing are shown in the flowcharts of the subroutine programs shown in FIGS. By this authentication sequence processing, a device information request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response, the P device returns a response of a device information response. The response of this device information response includes a main chip ID and a payout chip ID.

  The CU that has received the device information response stores the information included in the device information response, and requests authentication for the P devices that have responded (P devices identified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID). Is sent to P units.

The P devices that have received the authentication request return an authentication response to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the processing of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 24 will be described based on FIGS.

  First, referring to FIG. 25, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication after completing authentication with the P-unit communication control unit 81. A device authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit, and then a single unit authentication sequence is executed.

  Specific control contents of the device authentication sequence will be described with reference to FIG. The main control unit 323 performs device authentication using the encryption key (authentication key; see FIG. 6) acquired from the upper server 801. First, the main control unit 323 generates a random number A, encrypts the random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808, and transmits the encrypted random number A as the authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. In response to this, the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the encrypted random number A using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 and returns it to the original random number A. Further, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number B and encrypts the random number B using an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. Then, the random number A and the encrypted random number B are transmitted as the authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  In response to this, the main control unit 323 determines whether or not the received random number A and the random number A transmitted in the authentication request 1 match. If they match, the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 is appropriate. It is judged that. If they do not match, it is determined that the authentication result is inappropriate.

  Next, the main control unit 323 decrypts the received encrypted random number B with the authentication key and returns it to the original random number B. Then, the authentication result based on the reception of the authentication response 1 and the encrypted random number B are transmitted as the authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 80. In response to this, the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the received encrypted random number B with the authentication key, and determines whether or not the random number B transmitted as the authentication response 1 matches the decrypted random number B. If they match, it is determined that the authentication result of the main control unit 323 is appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined that the authentication result of the main control unit 323 is inappropriate. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the authentication result as the authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323.

  Returning to FIG. 25, next, a single authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. The subroutine program for this single authentication sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In this single authentication, challenge response authentication is performed. Challenge-response authentication is generally an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping of IDs and the like during communication by applying special processing to character strings. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random number sequence (called "challenge code") is sent to the recipient, and the recipient of the challenge code synthesizes the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. On the side that received the response code, generate a response code in the same way from the transmitted challenge code and pre-stored ID, etc., and compare the sent response code with the generated response code to see if they match Authentication is performed to determine whether or not.

  In FIG. 27, first, the single authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. In response to this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random numerical string such as a random number, generates a challenge code A, and transmits it to the main control unit 323 as a unit authentication response 1. The main control unit 323 synthesizes the received challenge code A and the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 in accordance with a predetermined algorithm to generate a response code A, which is used as a single authentication request 2 for CU communication control To the unit 80. In the CU communication control unit 80, the response code A is generated similarly by synthesizing the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 with the challenge code A transmitted as the single authentication response 1 according to a predetermined algorithm. The response code A and the response code A received from the main control unit 323 are compared to determine whether or not they match. If they match, authentication succeeds (authentication result is appropriate), and if they do not match, authentication fails (authentication result is inappropriate).

  The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the authentication result as the single authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323.

  In order to authenticate the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 generates a challenge code B including a random numerical sequence such as a random number and transmits the challenge code B to the CU communication control unit 80 as a single authentication request 3. The CU communication control unit 80 generates a response code B by combining the received challenge code B and the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809 according to a predetermined algorithm, and transmits the response code B to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 synthesizes the challenge code B transmitted as the single authentication request 3 and the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 according to a predetermined algorithm and similarly generates the response code B. The response code B and the response code B received as the single authentication response 3 are compared to determine whether or not they match. If it is determined that they match, the authentication is successful (authentication result is appropriate), and if they do not match, the authentication is unsuccessful (authentication result is inappropriate). The main control unit 323 transmits the authentication result to the CU communication control unit 80 as a single authentication request 4. In response to this, the CU communication control unit 80 returns a single authentication response 4 to the main control unit 323.

  The challenge-response authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the random number R1 is generated in the CU communication control unit 80, and the challenge code A is generated by encrypting the random number R1 using the SID (referred to as SIDM) of the main control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key. If expressed by an equation, challenge code A = ESIDM (R1). This is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with the stored SIDM. Expressed by the equation, response code A = DSIDM (challenge code A) = DSIDM (ESIDM (R1)) = R1. This is returned to the communication control unit 80, and it is checked whether or not the random number R1 previously generated in the communication control unit 80 matches the returned response code A (= R1). It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2, and the challenge code B is generated by encrypting the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the communication control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key. If expressed by a formula, challenge code B = ESIDT (R2). This is transmitted to the communication control unit 80, and decrypted with the SIDT stored in the communication control unit 80 to generate the response code B. Expressed by the equation, the response code B = DSIDT (challenge code B) = DSIDT (ESIDT (R2)) = R2. This is returned to the main control unit 323, and the random number R2 previously generated in the main control unit 323 is compared with the returned response code B (= R2) to check whether they match. It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  Returning to FIG. 25, when the authentication result is NG (inappropriate) in at least one of the single authentication sequence and the device authentication sequence, the main control unit 323 stops the subsequent processing shown in FIG. If the authentication is successful, the main control unit 323 transmits a P unit communication control unit authentication result request command to the CU communication control unit 80. As described above, the CU communication control unit 80 authenticates the P unit communication control unit 81 in advance, and the CU communication control unit 80 that has received the P unit communication control unit authentication result request command performs the P unit communication control. The P unit communication control unit authentication result response indicating the authentication result with the unit 81 is transmitted to the main control unit 323.

  The main control unit 323 then transmits a device information request to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the received device information request to the P units (see FIG. 24). When the device information response is transmitted, the CU communication control unit 80 receives it, and transmits the received device information response to the main control unit 323. Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (telegram key) from the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 and the received time information, and responds to the time to the main control unit 323. Send. The session key (message key) can be generated by any method. For example, the session key (message key) can be generated by synthesizing the received time information and the authentication key according to a predetermined algorithm, or received. The time information may be encrypted with the authentication key, and the encryption result may be used as a session key (message key). The session key is cleared when the power is turned off and is generated again when the power is turned on next time.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 26 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using a session key. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, encryption communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed after encryption and decryption using the session key.

  When a proper authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key of FIG. 25, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 28 is executed. FIG. 28A shows a case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 28B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 28A, after an operation instruction command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, a confirmation request for the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request). Is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the reception status of the operation instruction message (MAC error, CRC error, decoding error, data length error, disconnection detection) as a communication status response (see FIG. 19).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal when normal.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the operation instruction command to the P units (specifically, the P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the operation instruction command. In response to this, the P platform returns an operation response to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits a response to the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, FIG. 28B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal. The difference from FIG. 28A is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 confirms the communication status based on the communication status response and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal when the transmitted response of the communication state response is numerical data other than 0x00 shown in FIG. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes a retry of checking the communication state. Specifically, after an operation instruction command is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, a communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response returned from the CU communication control unit 80. To determine whether a communication status error has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication state is still abnormal as a result of executing the retry, the communication state abnormality notification control is performed. As the communication state abnormality notification control, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 to notify the communication state abnormality by the display 312 or the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked. Or a signal indicating that a communication state abnormality has occurred may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1. The number of times this retry is executed is shown as one in FIG. 28B, but may be executed twice or more.

  Next, returning to FIG. 24, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to the P units. In response to this, the P machine returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine (specifically, the payout control unit 17) to the CU as a response. This recovery data includes connection time, last SQN (sequence number), previous ball related information, and current ball related information. To be precise, the various data shown in FIG. 11, and “recovery data” in the following flowcharts are exactly the various data shown in FIG. 11. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is the SQN transmitted last by the P devices as described above.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU and the P platform, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also recovered as a result of trouble as described later. Sometimes even executed.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time an “operation instruction” is transmitted. However, it is not counted up when the operation instruction is retransmitted. The CU backs up the SQN and its request contents when transmitting an “operation request”. The P platform stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU as it is by “operation response”. When the P unit receives an operation instruction of the same SQN as the previously received SQN, the P unit determines that the re-transmission text is that the communication failure has occurred and the CU has retransmitted the operation instruction.

  After the recovery process is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from the P units, updates the sequence number to “0”, and initiates a communication start request (recovery clear ON). Is sent to the P units. In response, the P unit clears the recovery data and backs up the data at the new connection time received from the CU. And the P platform returns a communication start response to the CU. Thereafter, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform.

  As described above, the CU counts up the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request and SQN = 0 is transmitted to P machines. In response to this, the data of SQN = 1, the number of pre-addition balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 are backed up. To do. Further, the P platform clears the values of the counters of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) that are current ball related information to zero. Then, as for P platform, SQN = 1, number of game balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port (2) number of times = 0, And a game prohibition (game stop state) response is transmitted to the CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 on the basis of the operation response, calculates the current number of game balls by calculating the current number of game balls 0 + the received number of added balls 0−the received number of subtraction balls 0. In addition to backing up 0, the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, the cumulative number of start ports (1) = 0, and the total number of start ports (2) = 0 are backed up.

  Next, at the stage when the start-up process is completed on the CU side, the CU sends a game permission request and an operation instruction of SQN = n to the P machines, and the P machine that receives it sends a game permission refusal OFF as an operation response. , SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port (2) number of times = 0, and response of game permission to CU To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the processing of the connection sequence when the CU and the P stand are reconnected will be described. Here, “at the time of reconnection” refers to the time when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P platform has ended abnormally. This “abnormal termination” is described later, when the power supply is activated while holding the card in FIG. 41, or when the P unit in FIG. This is a case where power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, a. The connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 30), b. It is determined whether the connection sequence is restarted later (see FIG. 48), or whether the SQN backed up by c.CU is inconsistent with the SQN transmitted from the P unit, When it is determined that any one of c is present, it is determined that the normal communication is not completed (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 29 is executed instead of FIG.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 24, and here, differences will be mainly described.

  First, the time when P devices prohibit the game and start communication is immediately after receiving the device information request command from the CU. This is because the P unit can recognize that the P unit has been reconnected only after receiving a device information request from the CU.

  Next, since the connection sequence in FIG. 24 is when the power is turned on, a communication clear request command for recovery clear ON is transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit clears the recovery data in response to the command. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 according to SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and all the previous ball related information and current ball related information are cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence of FIG. 29, since it is at the time of reconnection, there is a case where the recovery information backed up inside the P units does not match the information stored on the CU side. Therefore, in the CU, after starting the recovery process, the game balls and the like are corrected in accordance with the contents of the recovery data (the previous ball related information, the current ball related information, etc.) on the P platform included in the recovery response. Execute the process. Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information, and game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from the P unit, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back Ball addition information—Calculates the number of game balls fired and performs processing to correct the stored number of game balls to the calculated new number of game balls. Recovery data from the corrected number of game balls and P units Is compared with the game ball total number information transmitted as, and it is determined whether or not they match. If they do not match, a command with game ball correction ON, that is, Bit 2 of data correction request set to “1” is transmitted to the P units as a communication start request. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the P unit is compared with the final SQN stored in the CU to determine whether or not they match. SQN correction ON, that is, a command for setting Bit 1 of the data correction request to “1” is transmitted to the P units. Also, the correct number of game balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P units.

  The P machine receives the communication start request command, and performs a correction process to match the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P machine with the information of the CU. Specifically, a process of correcting SQN = 3 and game balls = 300 and backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  The CU backs up the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted from the P units at the stage where the recovery process is completed, and backs up the connection time that is the time of reconnection. And about the sequence number, when the last SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the recovery process is started, if it is determined that the communication partner P units do not match, or if the SQN is determined to be abnormal, the recovery response transmitted from the P unit The number of the current game balls included in is converted to a one-handed ball. The “mochidama” refers to the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by the player. Then, after the possession ball is recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the possession ball of the recording medium, and the possession ball is converted into a game ball, and then replay is possible. At that time, similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation shown in FIG. 24, recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit receives the recovery data in response to the request. clear. In the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P units in the first operation instruction, and the PQ backs up the SQN = 1. In addition, in the P-unit, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, the number of front start ports (2) = 0 is backed up, and the number of additional balls, subtracted balls Each counter value of the number, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) is cleared to zero.

  Next, processing during standby will be described with reference to FIG. This standby state is a state in which no game is played on the P platform, a card is not inserted in the CU, and the rental button 321 and the replay button 319 are not operated at all.

  First, an operation instruction command with no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response to this, in the P-unit, the response of the operation response is SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port (2) The number of times = 0, and data indicating that the game is possible are transmitted. The CU backs up SQN = n + 2 every time an operation instruction command is transmitted. In the next operation instruction command from the CU to the P platform, data of SQN = n + 2 is transmitted. In response to this, the P-unit backs up SQN = n + 3, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0. The counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2), and the number of game balls are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P units have an operation response of SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the number of start ports (2) = 0, And a response indicating that the game is possible is transmitted to the CU. In the CU, every time a response of the operation response from the P platform is received, the number of game balls = 0, the total number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the total of starting ports (1) = 0, and the starting port ( 2) Back up cumulative number = 0.

  With reference to FIG. 31, the processing of the CU and the P unit when a card is inserted will be described. At the time of inserting the card, the P units execute the same processing as the standby processing shown in FIG. 30 without executing any special processing by inserting the card.

  On the other hand, in the CU, in the command transmission process to the P units, the same process as that in the standby mode shown in FIG. 30 is executed. When the card is inserted, the CU outputs a command signal for taking the card to the card reader / writer 327, and the card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the taken-in card. Card insertion processing such as receiving a card is executed.

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is done by inquiring about the suitability of the inserted card, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or inquiring the upper-level server such as the hall management computer 1 etc. This means that it is in the middle of executing the process of displaying on the display 312 and displaying on the P-side display 54. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 and the like, the CU displays that the card inserted in the display 312 is being inquired, and transmits operation instructions including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing to the P units. To do. In the P-unit, upon receiving the operation instruction command, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display device control command including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing to the display effect control board 53 to display the display effect. Control is performed to display that the control board 53 is inquiring about the card inserted into the display 54 (see FIG. 64).

  After that, as for P units, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports 1 times = 0, the number of start ports 2 times = 0, the game prohibition and special prizes A response including OFF of probability change is transmitted to the CU. Specifically, the special prize and the probability change are OFF in a state where all of Bits 0 to 4 in the gaming machine state 2 shown in FIG.

  The CU determines the balance and the ball when the card balance and the ball that has been inserted as a result of the inquiry about the card balance can be confirmed. In the CU, control is performed to display the prepaid balance of the confirmed card on the display 312, and addition display that is in the process of transmitting the confirmed holding ball (5000) as a gaming ball to the gaming machine (P units). The display inside is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 64).

  Then, SQN = n + 4, game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +5000 (number of balls required for addition) = 5000, and holding balls = 0 are backed up. At this point, the consumption of the ball is finalized.

  Next, as an operation instruction, a command including addition present, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 4, number of balls required for addition = 5000 and card balance = 7000 is transmitted to P units. . In the P unit, when the payout control unit 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000, display control including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 is performed. The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 displays on the display 54 that 5000 balls are being added as game balls (during addition display) (see FIG. 64).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, processing when the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted recording medium (card) is consumed will be described. In the processing of FIG. 32, the prepaid balance is “1000”, and the current game ball is “50”. First, a command with no addition, OFF during addition display, SQN = n, the number of balls required for addition = 0, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 0 is transmitted as operation instructions from the CU. In response to this, in the P units, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the number of start ports (2) = Responses of 0, game possible, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF are returned.

  On the other hand, the CU lends 500 yen, that is, 125 balls by one lending operation (ball lending operation). When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of balls to be added) = 175 and balance = 500 are backed up. In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Next, the CU is in the addition display. During this addition display, the display 312 displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the balance and are being added to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands with addition being present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 125, and subtraction request ball number = 0. Upon receiving the command, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  Next, the P platform backs up SQN = n + 2, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0, After creating the response, clear each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) to 0, the number of additional balls required for the current number of game balls 50 The number of game balls is updated to a value of 175 including 125.

  Then, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 175, balance = 500, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port (2) Responses of the number of times = 0, the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability variation OFF are returned.

  In response to this, the CU calculates and backs up SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 175 (number of game balls before update) +0 (number of balls required for addition) −0 (number of balls required for subtraction) = 175, and the number of additional balls The cumulative total = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 0, the starting port (1) total = 0, and the starting port (2) total = 0 are backed up.

  Thus, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  In addition, in the P machine, when an operation instruction command including the number of balls with and without addition is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing between the consumption of the ball (replay of the stored ball) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. The subsequent processing is executed in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the process at the time of replay which consumes a stored ball is demonstrated. In FIG. 33, the storage ball specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “1000”, and the initial game ball is “0”. The replay process in FIG. 33 is similar to the process at the time of consumption of the balance shown in FIG. On the CU side, when a replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a player's own game recording medium (member card or the like) is inserted and there is a storage ball specified by the card, SQN = n + 2 , The number of game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of balls required for addition) = 125 and the number of stored balls = 875 are backed up. Storage ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125 since 125 (the number of addition request balls) was withdrawn from the original storage ball = 1000. This is because the balance in the case of FIG. 32 is data in monetary units, while the holding balls in FIG. 33 are data in units of balls, so that it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000-125.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including “Yes”, “ON” during addition display, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 125, storage ball = 875, subtraction request ball number = 0 as operation instructions to P units. Upon receiving the command, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  The other processes are the same as those in FIG. As described above, the consumption of the ball is determined by the CU alone when the replay button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P platform, and the number of balls stored (the number of game balls is also The same) is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a process of subtracting the number of game balls (wagon service or the like) according to an instruction from the CU side will be described. In the amusement hall, a wagon service is provided in which a game ball owned by the player is consumed and drinks are provided to the player. When a player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 (see FIGS. 75 to 79) and places a wagon order so that the order content ordered by the player is a card unit. 3 IR photosensitive unit 320 is input as an infrared signal to a remote control possessed by a shop clerk.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. FIG. 34 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes “300” used game balls is generated in a state where there are “1000” game balls owned by the player. When a wagon order is generated, the CU performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of game balls used when the wagon order is generated, as SQN = n + 2, the number of balls required for addition = 0, and the number of balls required for subtraction. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but simply backs up “300” as the number of balls required for subtraction. Then, a command with subtraction, ON during subtraction display, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 0 and subtraction request ball number = 300 is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P platform. Then, the CU displays a display indicating that the subtraction is being performed (displaying) on the display 312 (see FIGS. 79 and 80).

  The P machines that have received the command determine whether or not the value of the game ball counter stored therein is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number. This determination is performed by the payout control unit 17. In FIG. 34, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is equal to or greater than the number of subtraction requests. In the P-unit, when the payout control unit 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, display control including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300 The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 displays on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as a game ball (during subtraction display).

  Next, the P platform backs up and adds SQN = n + 3, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0 and the number of front start ports (2) = 0. The counter values of the number of balls, the number of subtraction balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero. Then, according to the subtraction request ball number = 300, the game ball number is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the subtraction ball number 300 from the current game ball number 1000.

  Then, from the P platform to the CU, the subtraction rejection is OFF, SQN = n + 3, the number of current game balls = 700, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port (2) A response indicating that the number of times = 0, the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability variation OFF is returned.

  Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 1000 (number of game balls before update) −300 (number of balls required for subtraction) +0 (number of balls to be added) −0 (number of subtraction balls) = 700, and game balls The number is corrected to “700” and backed up. Thus, the subtraction of the number of game balls is determined only after waiting for the response of the motion response from the P units.

  Further, the CU backs up the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the starting port (1) cumulative = 0, and the starting port (2) cumulative = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P units determine that the value of the game ball counter stored therein is less than the subtraction request number, the P units do not perform subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . In this case, the P platform returns an operation response indicating that the subtraction rejection is ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU is notified that the game balls have not been subtracted based on the subtraction request because the P cars refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 33, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU is determined only after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 32, the accumulated (contained) consumption based on the instruction from the CU is determined when the CU accepts the retained consumption.

  In this way, the reason for determining the different timings for the “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” and the “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction of the CU” is as follows.

  At the stage when the CU has received a subtraction process for the number of game balls, such as a wagon order, the subtraction instruction is sent because there is a margin in the number of game balls, but the game balls are used in the game when the P units receive the subtraction instruction. As a result, there are cases where the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction does not remain.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is confirmed based on the number of game balls stored in the CU at the stage when the CU accepts the subtraction process, the number of game balls actually does not remain on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be finalized, resulting in a contradiction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” is determined after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units.

  On the other hand, for “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction from the CU”, it is an instruction to add the number of game balls, so the P units are stored when the instruction reaches the P units. Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, “save (contained ball) consumption based on CU instruction” is determined when the CU accepts the storage (contained) consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, processing when a big hit occurs during the game will be described. In FIG. 35, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and a probability variation big hit occurs while the operation instruction and the response of the operation are being transmitted and received between the P units and the CU in the game. After the completion of the control, the probability change in which the jackpot occurrence probability is improved is shown.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n is backed up, and a command with no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P units. In response to this, the P-unit backs up SQN = n + 1, the number of pre-added balls = 3, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 13, the number of front start ports (1) = 1, and the number of front start ports (2) = 1. The number of game balls = 1010 + 3 (the number of added balls) −13 (the number of subtracted balls) = 1000 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1000. Further, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P units have an operation response of SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 1000, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtracting balls = 13, the number of start ports (1) = 1, the number of start ports (2) = 1, A response indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability change is OFF is transmitted to the CU. In this way, the P units transmit not only the number of subtraction balls and the number of addition balls, but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether or not the number of game balls stored in the P unit matches the number of game balls managed by the CU.

  In addition, in the P platform in the present embodiment, as described above, 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 per minute, and therefore, one pachinko ball is shot into the game area in 0.6 seconds. Will be included. As described with reference to FIG. 21, since the command / response is transmitted at intervals of 200 ms, the number of subtraction balls between transmission of the previous response and transmission of the current response is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P platform to the CU is either 0 or 1. However, when the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of game balls does not change so much, and the processing flow becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as necessary are exaggerated for convenience.

  In the CU that has received the response of the operation response, the number of game balls = 1010 + 3-13 = 1000 is calculated and the 1000 is backed up as the number of game balls, and the cumulative number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, the start port (1) Accumulation = 1 and Start port (2) Accumulation = 1 are backed up.

  While repeatedly performing the transmission / reception of such an operation instruction command and an operation response response, a probable big hit occurs in the P units, and the ball related information includes the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtraction balls is changed to 20, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the number of start ports (2) = 2. Then, the probability change starts after the big hit at the P platform. In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P platform, SQN = n + 3 is backed up, and the number of pre-added balls = 120, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 20, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, and the number of front start ports (2) = 2 are backed up. At the same time, the number of game balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1100. Further, after creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P units have an operation response of SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, the number of subtraction balls = 20, the number of start ports (1) = 2, the number of start ports (2) = 2, A response indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is ON, and the probability change ON is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100, corrects the number of game balls in that 1100, and backs up, and the cumulative number of additional balls = 120, the total number of subtracted balls = 20, start-up port (1) accumulation = 2, and start-up port (2) accumulation = 2. Further, the CU detects that “special prize” and “probability change” have started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a process in the case where it is detected that there is no game ball while playing with P cars will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 20, and first, the CU backs up SQN = n and transmits commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n to the P units as operation instructions. In the P-unit, SQN = n + 1, the number of pre-added balls = 3, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 18, the number of front start ports (1) = 1, and the number of front start ports (2) = 1 are backed up. Then, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P units have an operation response of SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 5, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtracting balls = 18, the number of start ports (1) = 1, the number of start ports (2) = 1, A response indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability change is OFF is transmitted to the CU. The CU calculates SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 20 + 3-18 = 5, and then corrects and backs up the number of game balls, and the cumulative number of additional balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 18, Back up 1) Cumulative = 0 and Start Port (2) Cumulative = 0. After that, since the number of subtracted balls is 5 in P units, the number of game balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0 The starting port (2) number of times fluctuates to zero. At the stage where the number of game balls becomes 0, no balls are detected in the P units, and the payout control unit 17 automatically stops driving the ball striking motor 18 so that the ball cannot be hit into the game area. Control to prohibited state. It should be noted that if the variable display device is already in variable display at that stage, the variable display is continued only by stopping the hitting of the hit ball. If there is a start memory at the start port (1) count or the start port (2) count at the stage where the firing stop control is performed, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the storage is continued.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, SQN = n + 3 is backed up, and the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 5, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 are backed up, After creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P units have an operation response of SQN = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracting balls = 5, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the number of start ports (2) = 0, A response indicating that the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability change is OFF is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 5 + 0−5 = 0, corrects the number of game balls to 0, and backs up, and also adds the total number of balls = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 5, the start port (1) Cumulative = 1, and start port (2) Cumulative = 0.

  In this way, the main management of the number of game balls is performed by the CU, but only when the game prohibition control (launching stop control) is performed when the number of game balls reaches 0 in the P platform, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (launch stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as the operation response, the final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to perform ball hitting stop control at the moment when the number of game balls becomes zero on the P platform side.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the response of the motion response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from the P platform side becomes 0 is received. Wait, when the final number of game balls is calculated on the CU side and becomes 0, a command for operation instruction with a prohibition request for prohibiting the game is transmitted to the P base side, and received When hitting ball stop control is first performed on the P platform side, there is a possibility that a pachinko ball will be shot and fired during the response and command transmission / reception, and a new number of subtraction balls may be generated during that time. On the other hand, although the number of game balls has already become “0”, a new subtraction ball number is generated and eventually the game ball number becomes negative. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, only the ball hitting stop control when the number of game balls becomes 0 is controlled based on the number of game balls on the P platform side.

  As described above, since the game control represented by the hitting ball stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the P player itself, this control is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the CU. Compared with the case where such game control is performed, the game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Here, although the example in which the payout control unit 17 performs the hitting ball firing stop control is shown, the main control board 16 (see FIG. 4) may be configured to perform the hitting ball shot stop control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control unit 17 transmits a signal indicating that the number of game balls is 0 to the main control board 16 when the number of game balls is determined to be 0. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits the driving of the ball striking motor 18.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, processing when a card return operation is performed will be described. In the state where the number of game balls is initially set to 500, an operation instruction from the CU to the P unit, and in response to an operation response from the P unit to the CU, when the return button 322 is pressed, the CU As the next operation instruction, a command of prohibition for prohibiting a game, no clear request, OFF during clear display, and a command of SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units. In the P platform, in accordance with the instruction with the prohibition request included in the command, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped to control the hitting stop state. Thereafter, a waiting time of 10 seconds is provided in consideration of the time from when the already fired balls flow down in the game area 27 to all flow out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. Polling is continued between the P units and the CU during the wait time of 10 seconds. As an operation response during the wait time, the P platform is prohibited refusal OFF, SQN = n + N, the number of game balls = 500, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port ( 2) The response of the number of times = 0, game prohibition, game completion OFF, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. As an operation instruction during the wait time, the CU transmits no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, and SQN = n + N + 1 to the P units.

  As a response after 10 seconds have passed, the P platform is SQN = n + N + 2, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port (2 ) Number of times 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF operation responses are transmitted to the CU. This “game completion ON” has a role as initializeable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing initialization of the number of game balls in the P units. The number of game balls transmitted at this time is the final number of game balls at the end of the game. This sequence example shows a case where the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are not changed by the floating ball. If a prize is generated by a floating ball, or if a foul ball is generated, the number of payouts or the number of foul balls corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the CU as an “added ball number”.

  The CU that has received the response of the operation response detects the completion of the game, and backs up SQN = n + N + 3 and data with clear request. Furthermore, according to “the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2)” included in the motion response, the stored “number of game balls, total number of added balls, total number of balls” Each data of “the number of subtraction balls, start opening (1) total winning prize, starting opening (2) total winning prize” is updated. As a result, the number of game balls at the end of the game is determined on the CU side. As described above, since the final number of game balls is determined on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the P platform side, and the cost of the P platform can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including clear request present, clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units. Thereafter, the CU causes the display 312 to display a message indicating that clearing is being performed (clearing is being displayed) (see FIGS. 84 and 85). This “clear request exists” is data instructing initialization of the number of P game balls.

  In the P platform, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect production control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a display screen that is being cleared (screen that is being cleared).

  In this example, the CU receives the input of the “signal for requesting the end of game” based on the operation of the return button 322, and determines the number of game balls at the end of the game. However, the “signal for requesting the end of the game” is not limited to a signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates a player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. The game is allowed as a condition. Furthermore, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential at the end of the game, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal for requesting game end” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request signal” is constituted by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Returning to the description of FIG. When the clear request is present and the clear display is in progress, the P units that have received the command of SQN = n + N + 3 clear (initialize) the values of the stored data to zero. Here, the data cleared by the P platform is the current ball related information and the previous ball related information shown in FIG. As a result, the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, the starting port (1) winning counter, the starting port (2) winning counter, and the number of gaming ball counters are stored as the previous counter values. The data on the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings for the starting port 1 and the number of winnings for the starting port 2 are cleared (initialized).

  Next, as for the operation P, the clear response OFF indicating that the clear request is not rejected, SQN = 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) as an operation response = 0, start port (2) number of times = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF response are transmitted to the CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, game balls = 0, and holding balls = 500. This holding ball = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of game balls received immediately before the clear request, to the holding ball.

  After that, the CU records the holding ball = 500 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, as operation instructions, SQN = m + 1, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the number of start ports (2) = 0, a game prohibited, a game A response of completion ON and special prize OFF is transmitted to the CU. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card. In this way, both the recording of the card score directly on the card and the storing of the score in association with the card number in the host server are collectively referred to as “associating” the score with the card. To do.

  With reference to FIG. 38, the process when the glass door 6 is unlocked and opened will be described. First, as a first operation instruction, a command including an instruction not to open a glass door and requesting no glass opening is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Receiving it, the P vehicle returns a normal response including the number of game balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, if a trouble occurs such as a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 on the P platform, the player calls the attendant at the game hall. An infrared signal for unlocking and opening the glass door 6 by operating the remote controller is transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 inputs a glass door opening instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands for prohibiting the game to stop, no glass opening request, and SQN = n + 2 to the P platform. That is, before the glass door 6 is actually opened, first, an operation instruction with a prohibition request and no glass opening request is sent to the P platform in order to perform the hitting stop control at the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state. Next, the P platform returns, as an operation response, a response including prohibition rejection OFF indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected and game prohibition data indicating that the game prohibition state is set to the CU.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the operation instruction command including the above-described prohibition request is transmitted to the P units, the time until all balls fired in the game area 27 in the P units flow out and are collected, that is, floating In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a 10-second wait is provided. During this time, the CU continues to poll by sending a command including an instruction indicating that the game is prohibited, that is, a prohibition request, to the P units.

  Then, when the wait time of 10 seconds has passed, a command including a glass opening request for releasing the lock of the glass door 6 to be opened and an instruction of SQN = n + N is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  In response to this, the P door energizes the glass door opening solenoid 10 to unlock the glass door 6 to open the glass door 6, and turns on the bit during the development of the glass door. Until it is closed (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is inputted). Then, the P platform returns a response including a response such as glass open refusal OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, game prohibition, and glass development in progress as an operation response to the CU.

  In the CU, if the glass opening request command is not rejected, that is, if a response including a response of glass opening rejection ON is not returned, it is determined that the glass door 6 has been opened. Thereafter, a command including no glass opening request is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  FIG. 39 shows a modification of the glass door opening process shown in FIG. The difference from the processing of FIG. 38 is that when the glass door opening instruction input is detected in the CU, not only the prohibition request for instructing the prohibition request of the game but also the glass door 6 is unlocked. A command with a glass opening request instructing an opening request is transmitted to the P units. Upon receiving this command, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state. At the same time, all the balls shot in the game area 27 flow into the out balls and are collected. Considering the floating ball processing waiting time, a 10 second weight is provided. During the wait time of 10 seconds, the CU and the P platform continue to transmit / receive operation instructions / operation responses. When the wait time of 10 seconds elapses, the glass door opening solenoid 10 is excited to unlock the glass door 6 and the glass door 6 is opened. Then, the bit during the development of the glass door is turned ON, and thereafter, it remains ON until the glass door 6 is closed (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is inputted).

  And as for P platform, glass opening refusal OFF which does not refuse opening of a glass door as an operation response, a game prohibition which shows that it is in the state where ball hitting is stopped, and that the lock of the glass door is released and it is being opened A response including data such as that during glass development is shown to the CU.

  The CU determines that the glass door 6 has been opened by receiving an operation response of glass opening refusal OFF.

  As described above, the modification shown in FIG. 39 is characterized in that the 10-second wait process considering the floating ball process waiting time is executed not on the CU side but on the P platform side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a process for unlocking and releasing the cell (front frame) 5 will be described. The opening process of the cell (front frame) 6 is the same as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  When an attendant at the game hall operates the remote control to unlock and release the front frame (cell) 5, infrared light including a cell release command signal is output from the remote control to the IR photosensitive unit 320. Is done. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 outputs a cell opening command signal to the main control unit 323. As a result, it is determined in the CU that a cell opening instruction input for opening the cell has been detected. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including data such as prohibition request existence and cell opening request absence data for prohibiting the game to the P units. In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball firing motor and controls the hitting ball firing stop state.

  In the CU, a 10-second wait is provided in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and when the 10-second wait time ends, the cell open request data that is an instruction to unlock and release the cell is received. The command including it is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform releases the front frame 5 by exciting the front frame opening solenoid 11 to unlock the front frame 5. Then, the bit during cell development is turned ON, and thereafter ON is maintained until the cell is closed (until a detection signal is input from the front frame closing detector 13).

  And as for the P platform, as an operation response, cell opening rejection OFF that does not reject the cell opening request, game prohibition indicating that it is in a ball hitting stop state, cell development underway indicating that the cell is being opened, etc. A response including data is transmitted to the CU.

  If the CU is not rejected with respect to the cell opening request, that is, if a response including cell opening rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell has been opened.

  Note that, in the process for releasing the cell shown in FIG. 40, the P platform side has a function of providing a 10-second weight in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, as in the modification shown in FIG. When the command input for cell opening is detected, the CU sends a command including instructions for prohibition request and cell opening request to the P units, and the P unit side receives the command and performs the hit ball firing prohibition control. After that, the operation instruction / response is continued between the 10-second wait period CU and the P platform, and when the 10-second wait time has elapsed, the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited to lock the front frame 5 May be released after being released, and then a response including data indicating that cell open refusal OFF and cell development is in progress may be transmitted to the CU.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or cell, which is a specific example of the front member of the P platform, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a description will be given of processing when the power is activated while the CU is holding the card, and an abnormality in which the P units are not connected at that time occurs. Since a communication interruption occurred between the CU and the P unit while a card was inserted and a game was being played on the P unit, a device information request command was issued from the CU when the CU power was restarted. Sent to the machine. However, since an unconnected abnormality of P units has occurred, a response from P units is not returned to the CU. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 22, the CU retransmits the device information request command to the P devices. In spite of this, if no response is returned from the P device, the second device information request is retransmitted to the P device. If no response is returned from the P units for the second retransmission, at this stage, the CU determines that there is a communication error and displays on the display 312 that an error has occurred due to no connection. And a control to turn on or blink the abnormality notification lamp.

  In this state, when the store clerk operates the remote controller for the CU and outputs an infrared signal forcibly ejecting the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced ejection signal is sent to the main control unit 323. Entered. In response to this, the CU adds the “number of game balls” backed up by the CU to the “held ball” of the inserted card and clears the “number of game balls” and “connection time” of the CU to 0. Then, a command to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer 327. Receiving it, the card reader / writer 327 discharges the taken card. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card.

  After that, the CU transmits a device information request command to the P units and performs a resumption process of the connection sequence (see FIG. 29). The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state where a card is inserted (a state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 29 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation of FIG. To do. The number of balls to be added (for example, j) or subtraction balls during the period from the occurrence of P connection failure to the time when the connection sequence (see FIG. 29) is restarted and the first operation response is transmitted by P units. The process when the number (for example, r) is generated is performed by the restart process of FIG. Referring to FIG. 29, the CU receives the recovery response from the P units, thereby calculating the number of game balls = 0 + j (the number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of game balls as a result of the calculation. = J + r is backed up. Then, as described in FIG. 29, SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, and a communication start request including the value of SQN and the value of game balls are transmitted to P units, and the SQN of P units and the number of game balls And correct it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a process when the operation instruction from the CU (no requested operation) has not reached P units will be described.

  As described with reference to FIG. 35 and the like, the P platform receives the operation instruction command from the CU, and obtains the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number data stored in the current ball related information storage area. The back-up information is stored in the front ball related information storage area as the number of pre-addition subtraction balls and the number of previous start openings, and the data of the current addition subtraction balls and the current start opening number stored in the current ball related information storage area are cleared to zero. However, in the case of FIG. 42, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached the P units. Therefore, the above-described backup clear process is not performed on the P units. As a result, each time the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, or a start win occurs, these data are accumulated and stored as current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in a state where the current number of game balls is 520, the CU sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. However, since the command does not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described based on FIG. 22, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. If this re-transmission does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU, so the CU performs the second retransmission for the same operation instruction. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n, and the addition update of “1” is not performed.

  When the command reaches P units in the second re-transmission, until the operation instruction arrives, P unit uses the current ball related information as the data of the number of addition subtraction balls and the number of start ports as described above. As a cumulative memory. Then, using the accumulated and stored number of balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 490, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port (1) = 1, and the number of times of starting port (2) = 1 are transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 6 (the number of added balls) −36 (the number of subtracted balls) = 490, and corrects and stores the number of game balls in 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the processing when the operation response from the P platform (response to the absence of requested operation) has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 43, since the command from the CU is input to the P units, the backup clear process described above is executed, but the SQN value of the command transmitted from the next CU to the P unit is performed. Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P units determine that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and the previous time The current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information are cumulatively added to the data without clearing the data of the previous addition / subtraction ball number and the previous start port number which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, assuming that the current number of game balls is 520, the CU first sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. Upon receiving this, the P clearing process described above is performed to calculate the current number of game balls = 520−13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of game balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start port count data are backed up and stored in the pre-addition subtraction balls count and the previous start aperture count, and an action response command is created to present the current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start. Clear the mouth count data to zero. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the response data of the motion response. Then, the P units have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 510, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 0. Is sent to the CU.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as that of the previous time, that is, no request, SQN = n command to the P units.

  In the P machine that has received it, since the SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, the response of the transmitted operation response does not reach the CU. The current addition subtraction ball number as the current ball related information and the data of the previous addition subtraction ball number as the previous ball related information and the data of the number of times of the previous start port without clearing the data Back up data by cumulatively adding the data of the current number of starting ports. As a result, the number of pre-added balls = 3 + 3 = 6, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of front start ports (1) = 1 + 0 = 1, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 + 1 = 1. After the response of the operation response composed of these data is created, the data of the current number of added and subtracted balls and the current number of starting ports are cleared to zero. And as an operation response, the P platform is SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of start ports (1) = 1, the number of start ports (2) = 1 Send the response to the CU. However, since this response also does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) command to the P units again.

  In response to this, the P unit determines that the SQN received this time is the value (= n) one before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response has reached the CU. It is detected that there is no retransmission. As a result, the P platform performs cumulative addition storage on the previous ball related information, as described above, creates a response of the operation response, and returns it to the CU. Specifically, the response of SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 485, the number of additional balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of start ports (1) = 2, the number of times of start port (2) = 2 as operation responses. To the CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing for correcting and storing the data of the game balls in the 485.

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response does not reach the CU, the P units do not transmit the next operation response after retransmitting the unachieved operation response, but information that has not been reached. The information after adding up is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, the gaming apparatus can reliably and efficiently collect information regarding the number of game balls and the number of winning entries. In the example of FIG. 43, the case where the operation response from the P platform has not reached once has been described. However, if the operation response has not reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is not included. , The total value obtained by adding the motion response information transmitted the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a process when an operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P units will be described. The number of game balls at the current time is set to 520, the number of balls to be added when there is an operation for replaying a stored ball or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is set to 125, and first, as an operation instruction, the CU has an addition request, SQN = n, and A command including data of the number of balls to be added = 125 is transmitted to the P units. However, since the command does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the command with the same operation instruction. Since the re-send command has not reached the P units, the corresponding response from the P units is not transmitted to the CU. Therefore, as described above, the CU performs the second retransmission for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units. In the period when the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, the P units do not perform the above-described backup clear process, and the addition / subtraction data and the start port are added to the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information. Accumulated addition of count data is stored.

  Then, P units calculate the current game ball number = 520 + 125 (addition request ball number) +6 (current addition ball number) −36 (current subtraction ball number) = 615, and the current game ball number data is set to 615. Create an action response. Specifically, the P platform has an addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 615, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the start as an operation response Mouth (2) Response of number of times = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, and corrects and stores the game ball number data in that 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, processing when the operation response from the P units (response to the addition request) has not been reached will be described. An explanation will be given of a case where the initial number of game balls is 520 and an operation for using the game as a replay of stored balls or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is performed and a request for adding 125 balls is generated. First, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the number of game balls = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P platform clears the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although the transmission is detected, the received command includes the number of balls requested for addition = 125, but the game balls are not added and updated based on the command. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  Further, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area in the same manner as the processing of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 630 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 630, number of addition balls = 6, number of subtraction balls = 21, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the addition request ball number = 125 is received, but the addition update is not performed, and the addition update according to the addition request is not performed twice. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 610, number of added balls = 12, number of subtraction balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are transmitted to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of game balls to 610, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional addition request, the addition update of the game balls is not performed, and the addition update in response to the addition request is performed twice. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, processing when an operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU has not reached the P units will be described. A case will be described where an initial number of game balls = 520 and a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to the occurrence of a wagon order or the like. First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands with a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 to P units. However, since the command did not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. Since this re-transmission command also did not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU performs a second retransmission of the same operation instruction command. This second retransmission command reaches the P units.

  In the P unit, during the period in which the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, as in the process of FIG. 42, each time an additional subtraction ball number and a start winning are generated, these data are accumulated and stored in the current ball related information storage area. To do. Then, at the stage when the command command for the second operation is input to the P machines, the game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, as an operation response, the subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 190, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 Is sent to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190, and corrects and stores the game ball in 190.

  In this way, when subtracting from the game balls, the CU first sends an operation instruction command including data on the number of subtraction requests and the number of subtraction request balls to the P units, and a response as an operation response to the command is received. After waiting for the response to the CU, the subtraction request is subtracted from the game ball. Although the main management function for adding and subtracting game balls and managing the current game balls is on the CU side, the number of balls added and subtracted from the P units on the CU side is different from the game balls that change momentarily as the game progresses on the P units. It is possible to calculate the current game ball by adding / subtracting the game balls only after the response including the motion response is returned, and the game in the CU compared to the P device for the period of waiting for the motion response from the P device. The calculation time of the ball is delayed. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data with a time delay with respect to the P units, and even if the current game ball on the CU side is the number of subtraction request balls, In reality, however, there may be no game balls left for the number of balls required for subtraction. Therefore, in this embodiment, when subtracting the game balls, the CU waits for a response of the operation response from the P platform, and subtracts the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the processing when the operation response from the P platform (response to the subtraction request) has not reached the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, first, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands indicating that there is a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520-300 + 3-13 = 210 is calculated and the number of game balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P units clear the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 210, the number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although it is detected that the transmission is a transmission, the received command includes the number of subtraction request balls = 300, but the game balls are not subtracted and updated based on the command. That is, the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not executed twice.

  Further, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area in the same manner as the processing of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 205, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracting balls = 21, number of start ports (1) = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the subtraction update is not performed while receiving the subtraction request ball count = 300, and the subtraction update is not performed twice in response to the subtraction request. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 205 + 6-26 = 185, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are sent to the CU . Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520−300 + 12−47 = 185, corrects the number of game balls to 185, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional subtraction request, subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and subtraction update in response to the subtraction request is executed twice. Don't do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, processing when the P units return an addition rejection response to the CU addition request will be described. The initial number of game balls = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, and first, a command of no request and SQN = n is transmitted from the CU to the P units as an operation instruction. . The P platform calculates the game ball = 520 + 3-23 = 500 and includes the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2), and the data of SQN = n + 1 An operation response is returned to the CU. The CU calculates a game ball based on the motion response and corrects it to game ball = 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands including addition request, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request balls = 125 to the P units. In the P platform, for some reason, a response of an operation response including addition rejection ON that rejects addition is returned to the CU.

  Since the CU has received an operation response including addition refusal OFF, it is determined that a game ball cannot be added on the P units, and there is a difference between the P units and the CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do so, a communication disconnection request command is transmitted to the P units. Upon receiving the request, the P platform returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a launch control signal for stopping the launch from the payout control unit 17 to the launch control board 31. The launch control board 31 that has received this stops the drive of the launch motor 18 and stops the game.

  In addition, as for P data, SQN = n + 3, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 6, the number of previously subtracted balls = 36, the number of the previous start port (1) = 2, the previous start port (2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 460, Current number of added balls = 3, Current number of subtracted balls = 13, Current starting port (1) times = 1, Current starting port (2) times = 1 Store the data.

  Next, a device information request, a device information response, an authentication request, and an authentication response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform. Device information request commands, device information response responses, authentication request commands, authentication response responses, recovery request commands, and recovery response responses are transmitted and received. In the response of this recovery response, the above-described recovery data stored on the P platform side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of game balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (current number of added balls = 3, current number of subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the reconnection process (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 29, and the CU transmits a command including game ball correction ON and game ball = 583 to the P units in the communication start request. In response to this, the P platform corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that the connection sequence is restarted after sending a communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication, and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 29 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power-on in FIG. To do.

  Also in the processing of FIG. 48, since the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units, a response including addition rejection ON is received as the operation response from the P unit. Even if a reply is received, the balance consumption has already been confirmed on the CU side at an earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, processing when P units return a subtraction rejection response to a CU subtraction request will be described. Since the initial number of game balls is 520, the number of balls to be added is 3 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received once between the CU and the P platform. Then, the game ball = 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  At this stage, when a wagon service order or the like occurs and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU uses a command of subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of subtraction request balls = 500 as an operation instruction. Send to the stand. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of balls to be added is 6 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 36 in P units, and the number of game balls at the present time is 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of game balls (480) is smaller than the number of balls required for subtraction (500), the subtraction request of 500 cannot be satisfied. Therefore, as for the operation P, the subtraction rejection ON indicating that the subtraction request is rejected as an operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2 and the response of start port (2) number of times = 2 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response, the CU calculates a game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction rejection is detected, and subtraction cancellation processing is performed. In the subtraction cancellation process, for example, the display 312 displays a message such as “Unable to subtract due to insufficient game balls”.

Thereafter, normal operation instruction and operation response polling are performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a process when the P units return a clear rejection response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed down with the initial number of game balls = 520, the CU instructs the P units to have a prohibition request for prohibiting the game and clears it as an operation instruction. A command including unrequested data is transmitted to the P units. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the process of FIG. 37, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during this 10-second wait.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a command for clear request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units. Receiving it, the P stand indicates that it cannot be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + N + 4, number of game balls = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, start port (1) times = 1, start port (2) number of times = 2 response of operation response is transmitted to CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a command of no request and SQN = n + N + 4 as operation instructions to the P units, and performs clear cancel processing. This clear canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Return operation is performed but canceling is not possible” on the display 312. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instructions and response is performed between the CU and the P platform.

  With reference to FIG. 51, a process when the P units return a permission rejection response to the CU game permission request will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 520, and in the trouble state where some kind of game prohibition factor has occurred, the operation instruction command and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P device in a state in which P games are prohibited. Then, it is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game elimination factor elimination” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. However, the P platform returns to the CU an operation response command including, for some reason, a state where the ball cannot be shot, that is, a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including a game permission request to the P machines as an operation instruction until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a process in the case where the P units return a prohibition rejection response to the CU game prohibition request will be described. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform. At the stage of “game prohibition factor generation” in FIG. Assume that a game prohibition factor such as an operation of the return button 322 occurs. At this stage, the CU transmits a game prohibition request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. In the P machine, the response of the operation response including the prohibition rejection ON for rejecting the game prohibition request for some reason is returned to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition refusal, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P units as an operation instruction until the game is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a process when the P platform returns a glass opening rejection response to the glass opening request of the CU will be described. When the input of the opening instruction of the glass door 6 is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 53, as in the process of FIG. And a command of no glass opening request is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for glass opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response of an operation response including a glass opening refusal ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door 6 for some reason to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU detects glass open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing glass open cancel processing. The glass opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open the glass door” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a process when the P units return a cell open rejection response to the CU cell open request will be described. When an input of a cell opening instruction is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 54, as in the process of FIG. A command with no open request is sent to the P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for cell opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response to the operation response including the cell open rejection ON which refuses to release the cell lock for some reason and releases it.

  In response to this, the CU detects cell open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing cell open cancel processing. The cell opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open cell” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side after reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. The command of operation instruction is transmitted to the P machines in the state of SQN = n at the initial number of game balls = 520, and the P machines have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 3, and the subtraction as the operation response. A response including addition / subtraction data of the number of balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. When the response reaches the CU, when the power is cut off at the CU after the SQN = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 500, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units. As described with reference to FIG. 23, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped. Play is stopped. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the response of the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is transmitted in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is recovered, the device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response transmission / reception are exchanged between the CU and the P unit as in the processing of FIG. Will do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of previous start ports (1) = 1, the number of previous start ports (2) = 1. Current game ball number = 470, current add ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current start port (1) number = 2, current start port (2) number = 2 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the communication partners are the same and that both SQNs match, and performs a process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation instruction. The initial number of game balls = 520, and the P units that have received the operation instruction command have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 23, the start port (1 ) The number of times = 1 and the response of the start port (2) number of times = 1 are sent to the CU, and the CU is accompanied by SQN = n + 2 and the game ball = 500. A command of SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to the P units. If the command does not reach P units and a power failure occurs at the CU immediately thereafter, P units cannot receive commands for more than 4 seconds after sending the last response, as in the process of FIG. If it is determined that the communication has been interrupted, a transition is made to the unconnected state, and at the same time, the driving of the ball striking motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is recovered, the device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response transmission / reception are exchanged between the CU and the P unit as in the processing of FIG. Will do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of previous start ports (1) = 1, the number of previous start ports (2) = 1. Current number of balls as current number of balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470, current number of added balls = 6, current subtracted number of balls = 36, current start port (1) number of times = 2, current start port (2) number of times = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one than the SQN on the P base side. Therefore, based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response Performs processing to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. Assuming that the initial number of game balls is 520, a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are sent back and forth between the CU and the P unit, and then a command indicating no request and an operation instruction of SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to the P unit. After that, the P units responded as follows: SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 470, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, start port (1) number = 2, start port (2) number = 2 A response was sent to the CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU and the power failure occurs in the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, If no command is transmitted, the cutting is detected, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped, and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is recovered, the device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response transmission / reception are exchanged between the CU and the P unit as in the processing of FIG. Will do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 6, the number of previous subtraction balls = 36, the number of previous start ports (1) = 2, the number of previous start ports (2) = 2. Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470-3 = 467, current number of added balls = 0, current subtractive ball = 3, current start port (1) times = 0, current start port (2) times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partners are the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) −3 (current number of subtracted balls) = 467, Total number of balls added = 6 (current number of added balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), total number of subtracted balls = 36 (current number of subtracted balls) + 3 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the addition request is reached. Initial number of game balls = 520 and prepaid balance is 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are sent and received between CU and P units, based on the number of added balls and subtracted balls generated between them When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball count = 125 as operation instructions to P units. If this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the hitting motor 18 when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 22, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the device information request, the device information response, the authentication request, the authentication response, the recovery request, and the recovery response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P device in the same manner as the processing of FIG.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of previous start ports (1) = 1, the number of previous start ports (2) = 1. Current game ball number = 470, current add ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current start port (1) number = 2, current start port (2) number = 2 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one from the SQN on the CU side, so that the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. . Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 595, the total number of added balls = 6, the total number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request. Initial number of game balls = 520, prepaid balance = 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are transmitted / received between CU and P units, and game balls = After reaching 500, the lending button 321 was pressed. Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, sets the balance to 500 yen, and determines the balance consumption at this stage. Then, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands of addition request present, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P units have SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the number of start ports (2). A response of = 2 is transmitted to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to this response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 23, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped. Play is stopped. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P response transmission of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 595-3 = 592 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is recovered, the device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response transmission / reception are exchanged between the CU and the P unit as in the processing of FIG. Will do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 6, the number of previous subtraction balls = 36, the number of previous start ports (1) = 2, the number of previous start ports (2) = 2. The current number of balls as the current number of balls = 592, the current number of added balls = 0, the current subtraction ball = 3, the current start port (1) number of times = 0, and the current start port (2) number of times = 0 are stored. And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (the number of previous addition balls) +0 (the number of current addition balls) −36 (the number of previous subtraction balls) −3 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 592. Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls in between. When a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to a wagon service request or the like, the CU assumes that SQN = n + 2 and the number of subtraction request balls = 300, the subtraction request is present, SQN = n + 2, and the subtraction request ball. Number = 300 commands are transmitted to P units.

  When this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the hitting ball launch motor 18 when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 22, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the device information request, the device information response, the authentication request, the authentication response, the recovery request, and the recovery response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P device in the same manner as the processing of FIG.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of previous start ports (1) = 1, the number of previous start ports (2) = 1. Current game ball number = 470, current add ball number = 6, current subtraction ball = 36, current start port (1) number = 2, current start port (2) number = 2 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units, and the backup value is based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. The process which corrects is performed. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units based on the value of the SQN, so that the subtraction request for 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery process. While subtracting, the subtraction request ball number 300 is not subtracted from the game ball number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the subtraction request. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls generated during that time. In the stage, when a wagon service request for 300 balls is generated, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of subtraction request balls = 300, the operation instruction includes a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 command is transmitted to P units.

  In response to this, PQ receives SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 170, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the number of start ports (2) = 2. Send the response to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 23, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped. Play is stopped. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P responses are transmitted in response to the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 170-3 = 167 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and activated, the connection sequence is resumed in the same manner as in FIG. 29, and the device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response transmission / reception are sent to the CU. Performed with P units.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 6, the number of previous subtraction balls = 36, the number of previous start ports (1) = 2, the number of previous start ports (2) = 2. Current game ball number = 167, current addition ball number = 0, current subtraction ball = 3, current start port (1) times = 0, current start port (2) times = 0 as the current number of balls And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the SQN of the P units is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, and the recovery sent in the recovery response The backup value is corrected based on the data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (the number of gaming balls of the CU) +6 (the number of balls added previously) +0 (the number of balls added previously) −36 (the number of balls previously subtracted) −3 (the number of balls currently subtracted) = 467, Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  The CU restarts the connection sequence by sending a device information request when the power is turned on, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU does not match the SQN sent from the P unit, and FIG. The connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 29 is executed instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation. As a result, in response to the operation instruction after recovery, the CU forces the game balls for subtraction cancellation to be added to the P platform side and corrects the SQN so that the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to the P units (see FIG. 29). In response to this, the P platform corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  As described above, even when it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation process is that the P unit side that has received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction. There is a possibility that the subtraction is rejected on the P platform side. When such a rejection of subtraction on the P platform side is performed, if the subtraction is confirmed on the CU side, there is a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when such a CU-side power interruption occurs, subtraction has been performed despite the fact that the P platform side should have rejected the subtraction instruction because the remaining points are insufficient. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the clear request is reached. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 62, as in the process of FIG. 37, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data indicating that there is a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and no clear request as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the process of FIG. 37, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during this 10-second wait.

  Then, when the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3 and transmits a command including clear request, clear display, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as an operation instruction, but the command does not reach the P unit, In the stage where the command is not received for 4 seconds after the last response is transmitted, the P platform detects the disconnection and stops the driving of the hitting ball shooting motor 18 to enter the play stopped state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 22, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the connection sequence is resumed in the same manner as in FIG. 29, and the CU and the P unit perform transmission / reception of device information requests, device information responses, authentication requests, authentication responses, recovery requests, and recovery responses.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N + 2, as the previous number of balls, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start ports (1) = 0, the number of previous start ports (2) = 0, Current game ball number as current ball number = 500, Current addition ball number = 0, Current subtraction ball = 0, Current start port (1) number of times = 0, Current start port (2) number of times = 0 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, it is determined that the clear request has not arrived, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response Perform processing. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (current game balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, start opening (1) Accumulation = 0, start port (2) Accumulation = 0

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a description will be given of a recovery process when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the clear request. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 63, as in the process of FIG. 37, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data indicating prohibition request with / without clear request for prohibiting the game as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the process of FIG. 37, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during this 10-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3, and transmits a command including clear request, clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as operation instructions.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P platform clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and also clears SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0. = 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of times of starting port (1) = 0, and the number of times of starting port (2) = 0 are transmitted to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 23, if the P station cannot receive a command after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication has been interrupted, and transitions to an unconnected state.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, the connection sequence is resumed in the same manner as the processing of FIG. 29, and the device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response are transmitted and received. CU and P stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 0, the number of previous subtraction balls = 0, the number of previous start ports (1) = 0, the number of previous start ports (2) = 0, Current game ball number = 0, Current addition ball number = 0, Current subtraction ball = 0, Current start port (1) times = 0, Current start port (2) times = 0 And sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative = 0 (current starting port (1) number of times), starting port (2) cumulative number = 0 (current starting port (2) number of times).

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing transition of display screens on the CU side and the P base side in correspondence with the control operation when the card shown in FIG. 31 is inserted. Referring to FIG. 64, in a state where no card is inserted, an operation instruction command without an operation request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit during standby, and a response of game ball = 0 is received as an operation response while waiting. A reply is sent from the P platform to the CU. During transmission / reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] at the upper left of FIG. 64, “None” in the column of “Card Type” is displayed on the CU display 312. “0 shot” is displayed in the title column of “game ball”. In addition, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper right of FIG. 64, the P display units 54 have “0 ball” in the title column of “game ball” and the title column of “card balance”. “0 yen” is displayed. In addition, the display 312 and the display 43 display various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time. For example, in FIG. 64, the number of starts, the number of jackpots, the number of chances of change, and the number of times of the highest consecutive number are displayed, and the number of starts between special prizes (effective start winning between one big hit and the next big hit) Count) is displayed as a bar graph. Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side includes a monetary amount setting amount display unit, a card balance amount display unit, a replay ball number display unit, a storage ball number display unit, and a ball lending rate display unit. Is provided.

  Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured with a touch panel as described above, and display items of “device information”, “setting change”, and “order menu” are displayed on the upper left of each display screen. By selecting and touching, the display screen is switched to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 64, a screen in a state where “device information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display section of “return”, “rental”, “replay”, and “call” in the lower part of each display screen. A command can be input to the CU by selecting and touching. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Lending" is touched, a game ball is lent out from the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card. If “Replay” is touched, replay can be performed using the possessed ball or the stored ball of the inserted card (member card). If “call” is touched, a notification for calling a game attendant is made.

  At the time when the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command indicating no operation request to the P units during the card insertion process as an operation instruction. In response to this, the P unit detects that the card insertion processing has been started on the CU side. After the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command, the host server (for example, the hall management computer 1) is in an inquiry state. In this inquiring state, the CU side display 312 displays “inquiry” as shown in the second “card balance inquiry screen” from the top, and the display on the P platform side. The device 54 inquires the server of the inserted card with an arrow displayed from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second [normal screen (inquiring card balance)] from the top. Picture is displayed. “IC” in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  The P machines that have received the operation instruction described above return a response of game ball = 0 to the CU while waiting as an operation response.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is verified by making an inquiry to the server and the possessed ball (= 5000) and balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. Then, a command with the number of balls requested for addition = 5000 and a card balance = 7000 is transmitted to the P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed for addition. In the P machines that have received this command, it is detected on the CU side that the card balance and the holding ball have been determined, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, on the display unit 312 of the CU, “5000 balls” is displayed in the holding ball display column as shown in the third “ball lending screen” from the top, toward the gaming machine. An arrow is displayed and the player is informed that 5000 balls are being transmitted to the gaming machine. On the other hand, on the P platform, as shown in the third [normal screen (ball lending)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display section and the card balance display section. As a result, a display indicating that the ball lending is being added (addition display is being performed) is performed. Then, “5000 balls” is displayed on the game ball display section, and “7000 yen” is displayed on the card balance display section.

  Next, a response including game balls = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P platform to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movement display of the ball indicating that the addition is being displayed, the addition display is ended, and the “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, on the P platform, the addition display is ended after a lapse of 2-3 seconds from the start of the movement display of the ball as the addition display is in progress, and the movement display of the ball by the display unit 54 is ended.

  As described above, the display of the start of the operation process such as inquiring or addition display is started at the same time between the CU and the P unit, while the end of the display of the operation process is completed from the CU to the P unit. It can be terminated at its own timing on the P platform side without transmitting a command or the like, and is not restricted by the termination timing on the CU side. As a result, unique display unique to the P platform can be performed.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a control process in the case where a player shares a game ball by dividing and transferring a game ball to another person during a game. The flowchart shown in FIG. 65 and FIGS. 66 and 67, which will be described later, shows control that allows the player to share and transfer the game balls to another person while continuing the game.

  Referring to FIG. 65, first, a card A as a membership card with a holding ball = 5000 is inserted into the CU. If this membership card is inserted into the CU, the membership card must be returned to the player at the end of the game, even if the gaming value of the membership card (money balls, savings and prepaid balance) is all zero. I must.

  After the card A is inserted, the CU transmits a command including the number of balls to be added = 5000 for adding “5000”, which is the ball of the card A, on the P platform side to the P platform. In response to this, the P platform updates the game ball to 5000, and transmits a response including the game ball to 5000 as an operation response to the CU. After that, the game is started on the P platform, and when the number of game balls decreases to 4000 with the execution of the game, 1000 balls of game balls are transferred to another person and the ball is shared (1000 When a ball (ball) designation operation is performed, the CU and the P platform are in a state of splitting the holding balls thereafter.

  The card B on which the ball to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) to another person is recorded, the stock card stored in the card stock section in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 to make up the card B Although writing and discharging from the CU, in order to discharge the card B, it is necessary to first discharge the card A that has already been inserted into the card reader / writer 327. At that time, if all the game balls (= 4000) at the present time are written and discharged to the card A (member card owned by the player), the game ball = 0 and the game can be continued thereafter. Disappear.

  Therefore, in order to make it possible to divide the points while sharing a game (shared ball sharing), the card A is ejected from the CU in the state of “held points = 0”, and the game balls corresponding to the points are CU To keep it as collateral information. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the card number of the inserted card A and the number of game balls = 0 are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server are searched, The score is updated to 0. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card A.

  After the card A (point 0) is ejected from the card reader / writer 327 of the CU, the stock card B (point 0) in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 and compensated. At that time, the game balls are subtracted as the game continues in the P units, and the game balls are in a state of 3800. A command including an operation request (operation instruction) with the number of balls to be subtracted = 1000 is transmitted from the CU to the P units in order to write 1000, which is the ball to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) to the card B. In response to this, the P number subtracts 1000 from the current number of game balls 3800 to obtain the number of game balls = 2800, and transmits an operation response including the number of game balls = 2800 to the CU. In response to this, the CU backs up the data of game balls = 2800.

  Next, the CU writes “Moving Ball = 1000” to the card B by the card reader / writer 327 and returns (discharges) the card B. When the player hands the discharged card B to another person, the game ball can be divided and transferred (shared ball) to the other person. In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing the ball. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

  After the card B is ejected, the CU waits for reinsertion of the card A, which is the player's membership card that has been ejected first, and displays on the display 312 to prompt the user to insert the card A (see FIG. 73). Then, the player who sees it inserts the card A into the CU. At that time, the game ball = 2750. If the card A is inserted into the CU, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected due to the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers match). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. If they match, the ball splitting (ball sharing) process ends, and a message to that effect is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 74).

  In the inserted card A, when the card is returned after the game is finished, the game ball is written as a holding ball and discharged from the CU.

  FIG. 66 shows the control operation in the case where the player inserts the visitor card B in which 5,000 balls are recorded into the CU and performs split transfer (shared ball sharing) while playing the game. Yes. In this case, since the card B inserted first is a visitor card that does not necessarily have to be returned to the player, the card to be divided by another person is written on the visitor card B inserted earlier. The ball is shared and the visitor card B is transferred to another person.

  First, by inserting the visitor card B (with balls = 5000) into the CU, an operation request including the number of balls to be added = 5000 for adding all the 5000 balls recorded on the inserted card B as game balls. (Operation instruction) is transmitted from the CU to the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stores the game ball = 5000 and returns an operation response including the game ball = 5000 to the CU. From that stage, the game is possible with P cars, and the game is in progress.

  Then, after the game balls are used in the game and the game balls are set to 4000, the player designates the shared ball (1000 balls) to divide and transfer the 1000 game balls to another person. From this stage, the player is in the state of dividing points. At this stage, the game balls are further used for the game and the game balls = 3800. Then, an operation request including a subtraction request number of balls = 1000 for subtracting 1000 balls of game balls for split transfer (share ball sharing) from the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response to this, the P platform subtracts 1000 from the current game ball 3800 to set the game ball = 2800, and returns an operation response including the game ball = 2800 to the CU. In response, the CU backs up the data of game balls = 2800. Then, “Moving Ball = 1000” is written in the card B held by the card reader / writer 327, and the card B is returned (discharged). At this stage, the process of split transfer of holding balls (share holding) is completed. Even after that, if the player continues the game with the P units, and the player presses the return button 322 to end the game, the process proceeds to the card return process shown in FIG. 37 and is stored in the CU. The stock card is taken out by the card reader / writer 327, and the data of the holding ball corresponding to the game ball at that time is recorded on the stock card and discharged.

  In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a score to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score stored in association with the card number received by the higher server is searched, and the score is used as the number of game balls received from the CU. In addition to updating to a corresponding value (= 1000 points), it is stored as a history that the card has been divided and transferred (share points shared) and that 1000 points are points generated by share possession. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B. And also about the stock card discharged | emitted at the time of a game end, the card number and the data of the number of game balls at the time of card | curd discharge | emission are transmitted to a high-order server, and it is matched with the card number received in the high-order server. Is stored, and a history that the owner of the card B is changed to the owner of the stock card is stored and stored. The CU then discharges the stock card.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing another example of divided transfer of game balls (shared ball sharing). Differences from the control process shown in FIG. 65 will be mainly described. The flowchart shown in FIG. 67 is the same as FIG. 65 in that the card A, which is a player's membership card already inserted, is returned first when the game balls are divided and transferred (shareball sharing). There is a game ball (200 collateral balls) necessary to continue the game during splitting, and the remaining game balls are recorded as cards in card A. Is different from FIG.

  Specifically, first, the player operates display unit 312 including a touch panel to designate holding ball sharing in which 1000 balls are divided and transferred. Then, the CU leaves the 1000 shared balls to be split and transferred and the 200 collateral balls described above in the CU, and calculates the remaining game balls 3800. Specifically, the current game ball (5000) −collateral ball (200) −shared ball (1000) = 3800 is calculated. Then, in order to subtract the calculated 3800 game balls, the CU transmits an operation request command including the number of subtraction request balls = 3800 to the P units. In response to this, the P units subtract 3800 from the current game ball 5000 and calculate and store the remaining game balls 1200. Then, an operation response including the game ball = 1200 is returned to the CU.

  The CU receives the operation response (response), leaves the collateral ball = 200, the shared ball = 1000 in the CU, and writes the holding ball = 3800 in the card A held by the card reader / writer 327. Discharge. In this way, in order to perform split transfer (shared ball sharing) of the holding ball while continuing the game in the P unit, the return of the card A that has been inserted leaving the collateral ball for play (play: 200 balls) in the CU Is done.

  Thereafter, the CU takes out the stock card (card B of the holding ball 0) stocked in the CU to the card reader / writer 327 and compensates it. In the meantime, the game is continued in P cars, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 60 are generated. As a result, game balls = 1200 + 10 (number of added balls) −60 (number of subtracted balls) = 1150.

  In the CU, an operation request command including the subtraction request number of balls = 1000 is transmitted to the P units in order to divide and transfer 1000 shared balls (shared ball sharing).

  In response to this, the P player subtracts the number of subtraction request balls 1000 from the current game ball 1150 to calculate the remaining game balls = 150, and transmits a response of the motion response including the game balls = 150 to the CU.

  The CU receives it, writes “Mochitama = 1000” on the card B, and returns (discharges) it. The player can perform divided transfer (shared ball) of the game balls by giving the discharged card B to another person.

  After the card B is discharged, the CU displays on the display 312 to prompt the player to reinsert the member card A that has been discharged. The player who saw it re-inserts the previously ejected card A (mochitama = 3800) into the CU. In the meantime, the game continues with P units, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 85 are generated. Therefore, the game ball at the time when the card A is reinserted = 150 + 10−85 = 75. When the card A is reinserted, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected along with the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers are the same). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. On the other hand, if they match, the CU adds 3800 recorded balls on the card A to the P units as a game ball. Therefore, an operation request command including the number of balls to be added = 3800 is transmitted to the P units. In response to this, the P platform calculates a game ball = 75 + 3800 = 3875, stores it as the current game ball, and transmits a response of an operation response including the game ball = 3875 to the CU.

  In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing the ball. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

68 to 85 are screen views displayed by the display unit 312 of the CU.
First, based on FIGS. 68 to 74, a display screen displayed on the display 312 in the case of performing the ball sharing shown in FIG. 65 will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 68, the player selects and specifies the ball sharing from a plurality of menus displayed by touching the display item (icon) of “Menu” displayed in the upper left half of the screen. The state thus obtained is the display screen for sharing the money shown in FIG. The shared ball sharing (game ball split transfer) can be either split transfer from a player-owned ball or split transfer from a stored ball. For this purpose, first, a message “Please select a ball sharing source” is displayed, and a display item (icon) representing a holding ball to be selected and a display item (icon) representing a storage ball are displayed.

  In the right half display screen of FIG. 68, the state of the card inserted at the present time is displayed. In FIG. 68, a membership card is inserted, and it is shown that the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, a holding ball of 0 balls, a storage ball of 500 balls, and a current game ball of 10,000 balls.

  Further, as the state of the CU, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending a game ball from the card balance is 500 yen, and 125 balls corresponding to 500 yen is the number of payout balls. Further, it is shown that the player can reload the card balance of the inserted card by inserting a bill into the CU.

  The player touches either “mochidama” or “reserved ball” on the left half of the screen to select and input a ball sharing source. Here, a case where “mochitama” is selected is shown.

  When the player selects “mochitama”, the screen shown in FIG. 69 is displayed. A message “Please select the number of balls to share” is displayed on the left half of the screen, and the number of balls to be shared is 500 balls, 1000 balls, 1500 balls, 2000 balls, 2500 balls, 3000 balls, 3500 balls, Nine types of 4000 balls and 5000 balls are displayed. The player selects and inputs one of these nine types. Here, a case where “1000 balls” is selected and input will be described.

  If the player selects and inputs “1000 balls”, then the screen shown in FIG. 70 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 70, a message “Your ball is divided by the above details. Are you sure?” Is displayed, and the number of balls on your card is 9000 as the details of the number of shared balls. It is displayed that the number of balls of a shared card to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) is 1000. Then, a display item (icon) “start ball sharing” and a display item (icon) “cancel” are displayed. The player touches one of these display items to select and input. If “Cancel” is selected, sharing of the ball is canceled. On the other hand, if “start ball sharing” is selected and input, ball sharing processing as shown in the details of the number of balls to be shared is started.

  If the player selects and inputs “start ball sharing”, then the screen shown in FIG. 71 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 71, a message “My card will be ejected” is displayed, and a ball sharing processing status image indicating the progress of the ball sharing processing is displayed. This ball sharing process status image has three types, 1, 2, and 3 as the processing order. In the first process, the player's (player) card is discharged, the shared card is discharged as the second process, and the third process. As reinserted my card is displayed as ejected. In the “status” column, “processing” and “waiting” are displayed from the top, indicating that the first processing is currently being processed. An image in which the user's card is ejected by a broken line from the first process is shown.

  On the right half screen of FIG. 71, 10,000 balls that are game balls in the P units at the present time are displayed blinking.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 72 is displayed at the stage where the card has been ejected. In FIG. 72, the “status” column indicates that the discharge of the card as the first process is “completed” and the discharge of the shared card as the second process is being processed next. . A state in which the shared card is ejected from the second process is indicated by an arrow.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 73 is displayed when the discharge of the shared card is completed. In the screen shown in FIG. 73, the user's own card has been discharged as the first process, and the shared card has been discharged as the second process. At present, the user's card is being reinserted. It is shown that there is. An image for inserting one's own card with an arrow is displayed at the third processing location.

  When the player reinserts his / her card into the CU, the screen shown in FIG. 74 is then displayed. In FIG. 74, a message “ball sharing is complete” is displayed, and the ball sharing processing status indicates that all of the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing have been completed. Then, since the sharing of 1000 balls has been completed, it is displayed that the number of game balls in P units at the present time is 10000-1000 = 9000, which is 9000 balls.

  Next, FIGS. 75 to 81 are diagrams of display screens by the display 312 when the control processing of the wagon service shown in FIG. 34 is executed.

  First, referring to FIG. 75, the display screen of FIG. 75 shows a state in which the player touches and selects and inputs a display item (icon) of “Wagon Service” displayed in the upper half of the left half of the screen. First of all, the message “Please select the type you want to order” is displayed, and as the wagon menu, “5 classic menu items”, “30 drinks”, “10 food items”, “sweets 20” 4 types of menus are displayed, and an “order status confirmation” icon is displayed.

  On the right half of the screen in FIG. 75, 1000 balls are displayed as the number of game balls at the present time on P cars. The player selects a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 1000 balls, considering that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. For example, when the player selects “30 drinks”, the screen shown in FIG. 76 is displayed. In FIG. 76, a message “Please select a product to order” is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown. The number of game balls required to order each menu Is displayed. The player touches and selects and inputs an item to be ordered from the displayed menu in consideration that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. An equilateral triangle icon and an inverted triangle icon are displayed on the right side where various menus on the left screen are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled down and the upper part of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the player touches the inverted triangle icon shown in FIG. 76, the screen is scrolled upward and the lower portion of the screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 76, after the player selects a coffee menu that requires 75 balls, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. Return to the wagon menu display screen, select the “Food 10 items” menu in FIG. 75, and with the food menu displayed, select “hamburger” that requires 100 game balls. The menu is selected, and then the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. 77 is touched to return to the display screen of the wagon menu in FIG. 75 again. A case will be described in which the icon “20 sweets” is selected and input, and the player selects “ice” that requires 50 game balls from the display screen of the sweets.

  In that case, the screen shown in FIG. 77 is displayed next, and the details of the order item selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the name of the ordered product, the number of balls consumed, and the quantity of the ordered product are displayed. In the case of FIG. 77, it is shown that one hamburger with a consumption of 100 balls, one coffee with a consumption of 75 balls, and one ice with a consumption of 50 balls are ordered. And it is displayed that the total number of balls consumed is 225 balls. In addition, an “add” icon is displayed in the quantity column of the order item details. When the player touches and inputs this additional icon, the quantity is incremented by “1” each time it is touched. The A “delete” icon is displayed on the right side of the quantity corresponding to each ordered prize. When the player touches this icon, the order for the corresponding product can be deleted. For example, touching “Delete” at the top deletes the hamburger order, touching the second “Delete” deletes the coffee order, and touching “Delete” the third “Ice” Orders are deleted.

  Further, an “add product” icon is shown below the order product details, and when the player touches this, the player returns to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. It is possible to select an order item and place an additional order.

  In addition, a “cancel” icon is shown below the order product details in FIG. 77, and the player can cancel all the order products ordered so far by touching this icon.

  Furthermore, an “order” icon is shown below the order item details, and when the player touches this, the order processing of the wagon service as shown in the order item details is executed. Become.

  When the player touches the “delete” icon corresponding to the “ice” order on the display screen of FIG. 77, the screen shown in FIG. 78 is displayed. FIG. 78 shows a state in which the order for “ice” has been canceled.

  On the other hand, when the player touches the “order” icon in FIG. 77, the screen shown in FIG. 79 is displayed. On the display screen of FIG. 79, an image being inquired about the ordered product is displayed. An arrow is displayed to indicate that transmission / reception is being performed between 225 balls, which is the total number of balls consumed, and 1000 balls currently played on P cars, indicating that communication is in progress. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 80, an arrow indicating that communication is in progress is first displayed in the direction from the “225” balls consumed to the “1000” balls in the P range. The text “Inquiry” is displayed.

  After this display is made, an arrow is displayed from the “1000” balls in the P direction toward the “225” balls to be consumed, and the text “inquiry” is displayed. Both of these displays are repeated a plurality of times. After the display, the screen of FIG. 81 is displayed next. In the screen of FIG. 81, a message “The order item has been accepted. The amount of the above-mentioned consumption balls has been withdrawn from the holding ball” is displayed, and the order item acceptance completion is displayed with the order product acceptance completion indication and It is displayed that the total number of balls consumed is “225”. In the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the game balls in the current P units are “775” balls as a result of the consumption of 225 balls.

  82 and 83 are display screens during addition display in the card insertion process shown in FIG. 31, and are the third display screen from the top of the display screens of the CU side display 312 shown in FIG. Another example is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 82, the left half of the screen shows game table information showing the same contents as the display screen on the CU side of FIG. 64, although the screen configuration is different.

  On the right side of the screen in FIG. 82, a display is shown in which all 1000 balls, which are the balls of the card inserted into the CU, are moving from the CU to the P platform to the P platform side.

  Then, at the stage where the movement of the ball is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 83, the message “Moving ball movement complete!” Is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the field of the ball is 0 balls. 1000 balls are displayed as game balls in the P platform, and the display of “1000” blinking is made.

  84 and 85 are display screens showing that a clear display is being performed in the card return process shown in FIG. First, referring to FIG. 84, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the current game balls in P cars are 1000 balls, and “1000” is displayed blinking. Then, a state in which the holding ball is moved from the P platform to the holding ball display field is displayed, and a character “moving ball holding” is displayed.

  Then, at the stage where the movement of the holding ball is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 85, and the state that the game balls on the P platform side are 0 balls is displayed, and 1000 balls are displayed as the holding balls. Then, “1000” is displayed blinking.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing another example of the back side configuration of the pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  Referring to FIG. 86, various winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h for detecting winning balls that are won in various winning ports provided in game area 27 are provided, and only the out balls collected from out port 145 are detected. An out-ball detection switch 701 is provided. The merge path detection switch 32 is provided in the merge passage path 702 where the out balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 and the prize balls detected by the various prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h merge and pass. Yes.

  Of these various detection switches, only the merging path detection switch 32 is constituted by an optical sensor, and the other detection switches are constituted by proximity switches. By configuring the various detection switches in this way, when a so-called radio wave is generated and an illegal radio wave is transmitted and an illegal act of illegally outputting a winning ball detection signal from various winning ball detection switches occurs, the proximity switch is Although a detection signal is output in response to the illegal radio wave, only the junction path detection switch 32 is constituted by an optical sensor, and therefore does not output any detection signal without responding to the illegal radio wave.

  If it is normal, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by the proximity switches should be the number of balls detected by the merge path detection switch. However, when a radio wave that transmits an illegal radio wave occurs, the detection signal from the detection switch constituted by other proximity switches is output without outputting the detection signal from the junction path detection switch 32. The ball detection total by the various detection switches constituted by the proximity switches and the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 do not match. Based on the occurrence of such a mismatch phenomenon, it can be determined that an illegal act has occurred.

  For this purpose, the payout controller 17 receives the detection signals from the various winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the detection signal from the out ball detection switch 701, the detection signal from the foul ball detection switch 33, and the detection signal from the merge path detection switch 32. Then, the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 configured by proximity switches is calculated, and whether the total and the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 match. Is determined. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54.

  As yet another example, the joining path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 86 is provided at a position below the joining point where the foul balls detected by the foul ball detecting switch 33 join the joining passage path 702, You may comprise so that the sum of an out ball | bowl and a foul ball | bowl may be detected by the joining path | route detection switch 32. FIG. In that case, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by proximity switches, that is, the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the total and the joining path are calculated. It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54.

  As yet another example, the joining path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 86 is left as it is, and is separated from the joining point where the foul ball detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 joins the joining passage path 702. May be configured such that the total of winning balls, out balls, and foul balls is detected by another merging path detection switch. In that case, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by proximity switches, that is, the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the total and the joining path are calculated. It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54. In addition, the above-described abnormality determination is performed by determining whether the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 matches the number of balls detected by the joining path detection switch 32 or not. Run in parallel.

Next, another control of the payout control unit 17 will be described based on FIG.
FIG. 87 (a) shows the firing and lifting control command output processing executed by the payout controller 17. In step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, it is determined whether or not the game prohibition flag is ON. The game prohibition flag is turned on when an operation instruction including a prohibition request from the CU is received, and turned off when a game permission request is received. If NO is determined in S <b> 1, a process of outputting a firing permission signal to the firing control board 31 is performed in S <b> 2. Upon receipt of this, when the touch ring signal is input by the player operating the hitting operation handle 25, the launch control board 31 drives and controls the hitting motor 18 to hit the hit ball.

  A signal of the launch motor origin sensor is input as the hitting ball launch motor 18 is driven. If there is an input of the signal, a determination of YES is made in S3, and control for driving the lifting motor 40 is performed in S4.

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag is ON, a process of outputting a launch control signal including a launch prohibition signal to the launch control board 31 is performed in S5. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 stops driving the hit ball launch motor 18 and puts it into a shot stop state where no hit ball is fired.

  FIG. 87 (b) shows error processing. By S10, it is determined whether or not the game prohibition flag is ON. If YES is determined in S10, it is determined whether or not a winning detection signal is input. If a detection signal is output from any of the winning ball detection switches 700 a to 700 h, the signal is input to the main control board 16, and the detection signal is input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. In S11, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input. More specifically, after receiving an operation instruction including a prohibition request from the CU, the floating ball processing waiting time (10 When a winning ball detection signal is input after the elapse of (second), a YES determination is made at S11.

  At this time, all the floating balls in the game area 27 should have been collected, and the fact that the winning ball detection signal has been input nevertheless means that a so-called radio wave attack that illegally generates a winning due to an illegal radio wave. There is a risk. In this case, control proceeds to S12, and an error notification signal corresponding to the type of error is output.

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag is OFF, it is determined in S13 whether or not a firing motor origin sensor signal has been input. If not, that is, if the firing motor 18 is not driven, the lifting motor 40 should also be stopped (see S3 and S4). Nevertheless, when a detection signal is input from the cue detection switch (upper) 41a or the cue detection switch (lower) 41b, YES is determined in S14, and depending on the type of error in S12. An error notification signal is output.

  Specifically, the output of the error notification signal corresponding to the type of error is a signal for performing abnormality display by the indicator 54, the point of the abnormality notification lamp (or blinking) or the abnormality notification by sound from the speaker. The control part 17 outputs. For example, in the case of an abnormality determined to be YES in S14, an abnormality display such as “the lifting device has operated abnormally” on the display 54, a point of a lifting device abnormality notification lamp (or blinking) or “ The payout control unit 17 outputs a signal to notify the abnormality from the speaker by a sound such as “the feeding device has abnormally operated”.

  When the firing motor 18 is not driven, that is, when a ball is not being fired, an error is notified when the lifting of the pachinko ball is detected by the ball raising detection switch (upper) 41a or the ball raising detection switch (lower) 41b. The reason is that if pachinko balls continue to be fed and supplied even though they are not being hit, there is a risk of clogging in the passage and failure may occur. This is so that it can be dealt with.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the number of game balls is managed on the CU side, there is no need to provide the management function on the P platform side, and the cost of the P platform is reduced accordingly. It can be suppressed as much as possible. In particular, the P machine has a short exchange cycle in the game hall in order to be able to provide a more interesting game as soon as possible, and tends to be exchanged early in units of several months if it is one year or early. . In addition, as new stands are being developed one after another, which quickly incorporates rapidly changing player preferences, there is also a tendency for the base exchange cycle in the amusement hall to be accelerated.

  On the other hand, CUs are rarely replaced from the viewpoint of preference, and in general, equipment replacement is performed in response to a failure. It is what is used. If no failure occurs, replacement is not performed for several years.

  For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the P units are introduced can be reduced by providing the management function of the game balls not on the P units side but on the CU side to suppress the cost of the P units.

  Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. Referring to FIG. 88, in slot machine 2S, front door 2b is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to main body frame 2a with its left edge as the center of swing.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front door 2bS opposite to the swing center. The engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS are provided at positions of the main body frame 2aS facing the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS. When the opened front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS, the engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS get over the engaging receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS, and the engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are moved downward by the biasing force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front door opening solenoid 110 (see FIG. 89) is provided on the back side of the front door 2bS, and the front door opening solenoid 110 is excited to energize a pair of upper and lower against the biasing force of the spring. The mating projections 6aS and 6bS are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6aS and 6bS are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS to be unlocked, and the front door 2b is opened.

  The front door closing detector 112 (see FIG. 3) is provided at a position in contact with the front door 2bS in the upper part of the main body frame 2aS, and the front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS to be locked. Detected.

  Next, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S will be described with reference to FIG. The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and performs communication via the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S and the S communication control unit 82. A CU communication control unit 80 is provided for this purpose. The card unit 3 is provided with a connector 330 for connection to the slot machine 2S side, and the slot machine 2S is provided with a connector 220 for connection to the card unit 3 side. The CU communication control unit 80 and the S unit communication control unit 82 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 220 and connection wiring.

  The currency identifier 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the identification result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  Display data such as the balance or the number of points is output from the main control unit 323 to the display 312, and the display 312 displays the output display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The slot machine 2S is electrically connected to a main control board 116 that controls the progress of the game of the slot machine 2S (game control) and a payout control unit 117 that transmits information about points and the like to the card unit 3. It is provided in the state. Furthermore, the slot machine 2S is provided with an effect control board 90 electrically connected to the payout control unit 117 and an effect ROM board 92 electrically connected to the effect control board 90.

  On the main control board 116 is mounted a main control unit 41 constituted by a game control microcomputer. The main control unit 41 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (Random) that functions as a work area of the CPU. Access Memory), and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control unit 41 includes a random number generation circuit that generates a predetermined range of random numbers, a sampling circuit that acquires random numbers from the random number generation circuit, and the like. The main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery for a winning combination using the random number acquired from the random number generation circuit.

  The main control board 116 has a single BET switch 500, a MAXBET switch 600, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, a game auxiliary display 120, a payout display 130, a start valid LED 180, a waiting LED 19, and a replaying. The LED 200, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected.

  The main control board 116 detects the start operation after setting the bet amount, starts variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), draws the results of one game, and stops each reel in response to the stop operation. Let

  Here, processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 2S will be described.

  In the slot machine 2S of the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line of the variable display device constituted by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  In the following, the big bonus may be referred to as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be referred to as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and set a winning flag for the winning combination.

  The “game” in the slot machine 2S, in a narrow sense, refers to a period from when the start switch 7 is operated until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  First, the main control unit 41 sets the bet number by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 500 or the MAXBET switch 600, and starts rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by detecting the operation of the start switch 7. .

  However, if the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage).

  When the bet number is set and the start switch 7 is operated, the main control unit 41 extracts a random number for internal lottery, and assigns each combination determined according to the gaming state based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not winning is allowed.

  The main control unit 41 performs a reel rotation process after the lottery process. In the reel rotation process, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game are processed on the condition that one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the time counted by one game timer has elapsed. The motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  The main control unit 41 stops when a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R after the rotation speed reaches a certain speed) is satisfied from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The operation of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is made valid. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped.

  When the driving of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the main control unit 41 performs a winning determination process for determining whether any predetermined role symbol is derived and displayed on the winning line. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that a winning combination such as BB has been won, a process for controlling the bonus (for example, setting a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  When the winning determination process ends, the main control unit 41 performs a payout process. In the payout process, an addition number signal indicating the number of points to be given is output to the payout control unit 117. In the payout process, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied is performed during the bonus (BB or RB) as various processes not related to winning.

  Next, each board other than the main control board 116 mounted on the slot machine 2S will be described.

  The payout control unit 117 is equipped with a holding point control unit 31 constituted by a holding point control microcomputer. The holding point control unit 31 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The payout control unit 117 includes a score counter for storing a player's total score separately from the card unit 3. The payout control unit 117 receives an addition request number signal from the card unit 3 when the player performs an operation to secure the score by deducting the valuable value owned by the player, and the payout control unit 117 In response to the addition request number signal, the score counter is added and updated. On the other hand, when the bet amount is set, the payout control unit 117 subtracts and updates the score point counter.

  Further, a front door opening solenoid 110 and a front door closing detector 112 are provided in an electrically connected state with respect to the dispensing control unit 117.

  When the front door closing detector 112 detects the closing of the front door 2bS, the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 transmits a front door opening solenoid excitation signal to the front door opening solenoid 110 to excite the front door opening solenoid 110 and unlock the front door 2bS.

  On the effect control board 90, an effect control unit 91 configured by an effect control microcomputer is mounted. The production control unit 91 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (Random) that functions as a work area for the CPU. Access Memory), and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The effect control board 90 is provided with a liquid crystal display 510, speakers 530 and 540, a chance button 58, and a jog dial 59. The effect control unit 91 inputs the data read signal to the ROM mounted on the effect ROM board 92, reads the image data, transmits the display data to the liquid crystal display 510, and sends it to the liquid crystal display 510. Control is performed to display a display screen such as a navigation effect relating to points, bets, or small roles.

  Further, the button input signal of the chance button 58 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 59 are input to the effect control board 90, and the effect control board 90 outputs the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the liquid crystal display 510. Then, a display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 59 and the operation of the chance button 58 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 510.

  Next, signals transmitted and received between the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S and between each board of the slot machine 2S will be described.

  From the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S, an addition request (holding point +), a subtraction request (holding point-), a game permission request, a game prohibition request, an addition request count, and a subtraction request Both numbers are sent as “commands”.

  The addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 117 when the points are lent by debiting the prepaid balance or the points are lent by operating the replay button 319. In response, the payout control unit 117 adds and updates the number of points. The subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 117 when a divided transfer of points (point sharing process) or a wagon service is performed. Receiving it, the payout control unit 117 subtracts and updates the score.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 117 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The number of addition requests is a command for designating the number of points to be added to the number of points by an addition request command. The subtraction request number is a command for designating the number of points to be subtracted from the number of points by a subtraction request command.

  On the other hand, from the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S to the card unit 3, the number of points indicating the value of the point counter stored in the payout control unit 117, the number of points added according to the winnings, and the number of bets The number of points subtracted according to the setting and external output information indicating various game states and the like are transmitted.

  The external output information includes bet number setting information (indicating the set bet number) transmitted when the bet number is set by operating the single BET switch 500 or the MAX BET switch 600, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Reel start information transmitted at the time of starting, internal winning status information (indicating the winning result) transmitted at the time when the internal lottery is executed by the start operation, and the time when each of the first to third stop operations is executed 1st to 3rd stop operation information (indicating stop reel type), result information (indicating the type of winning or winning combination) transmitted when the display result is finalized, and game state changed It includes game state information transmitted at the time (indicating the type of game state that has changed) and error information (indicating the type of error) transmitted when an error occurs.

  When the CPU of the main control board 116 detects an error that occurs during the game or a disconnection due to a connection confirmation signal, the CPU controls the lighting or blinking of the calling lamp provided on the curtain board and the I / O of the main control board 116. An abnormality notification signal for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality to the hall management computer 1 is output from the O port (not shown).

  The gaming state notified by the gaming state information includes a big bonus (BB), a regular bonus (RB), an RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, and an internal lottery result by the effect control unit 91. An AT (Assist Time) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect to be notified can be executed is included.

  From the payout control unit 117 to the main control board 116, a health check command, a prize payout number reception command, and a BET impossible signal are transmitted. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 116 is operating normally. The winning / dispensing number reception command is a command indicating that the addition number transmitted from the main control board 116 has been received. The BET impossible signal is a signal indicating that the value of the score counter has become less than the minimum value required for setting the betting number. When the main control board 116 receives this BET disabling signal, the main control board 116 enters a game prohibition state in which a game cannot be newly started thereafter. Specifically, the operation of the single BET switch 500 and the MAXBET switch 600 for setting the bet amount is invalidated.

  A connection confirmation signal is returned from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 117 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 116 to the payout control part 117. The payout control unit 117 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 117 receives the predetermined voltage signal.

  In addition, an “addition number +” signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117 when winning is detected, while a “subtraction number +” signal is detected when it is detected that reel rotation has started. Sent. “Addition number +” indicates the number of points to be added according to the winning, and “Subtraction number +” indicates the number of points to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. The payout control unit 117 adds the value of the score counter in accordance with the “addition number +” signal, and adds the “addition number” for transmission to the card unit 3. Further, the payout control unit 117 subtracts the value of the score counter in accordance with the “subtraction number +” signal and adds the “subtraction number” to be transmitted to the card unit 3.

  Further, various external output information indicating the bet number setting and reel start-up described above is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 transmits each external output information to the card unit 3 at the timing when the external output information is received. The external output information may be directly transmitted from the main control board 116 to the card unit 3.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 117 to the effect control board 90. This display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit (CU) operation command, a test command, and an effect command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating the gaming state of the slot machine 2S such as BB or RT, and the card unit operation command is a command transmitted in response to the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect control unit 91. The effect command is a command for instructing switching to various effect screens according to the gaming state.

  A command is transmitted from the payout control unit 117 to the effect control board 90 every 300 ms. The effect control board 90 detects a line disconnection and performs a time over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite a lapse of a fixed time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command is not transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by one, and the effect control is performed when the error count is counted ten times continuously. The substrate 90 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the liquid crystal display 510 to display an error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, main data among various data stored on each of the CU side and the S platform side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the fluctuation of the number of points on the S platform is calculated and the current number of points is managed. On the S side, the current number of points is calculated and stored. However, on the S side, the number of points is only to prevent a new game from being started as early as possible when the number of points is less than the minimum number required for setting the number of bets (for example, 0). It is a secondary thing used for. In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points on the S platform side, and the cost of the S platform is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, compared to the CU, the S units have a shorter replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. Therefore, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the S machines are introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with the main management function related to the number of points on the S machines side to suppress the costs on the S machines side. is there.

  FIG. 90 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU-side main control unit 323 and RAM storage data mounted in the S-side payout control unit 117. First, when the power is turned on with the S units (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control unit 117 on the S unit side The main chip ID is transmitted from the main control board 116, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 117 is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, connection time, that is, data of the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the transmitted connection time is stored on the S side. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S platform side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the S side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same S units as in the previous time are connected. Note that the connection time data is transmitted from the CU side to the S side when new power is turned on and communication between the CU side and the S side is started. Is stored on the S side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the S platform side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by “1” on the CU side and the S platform side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And S side. The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not the communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and S units in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the S units in response to the operation instruction, and then receives the SQN from the S units and rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the S units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the S unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU next time, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated for the S units.

  And when communication interruption occurs during communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection. On the S side, the operation response is always sent regardless of the occurrence time of communication interruption. Therefore, the SQN stored as a backup until communication reconnection is always the SQN transmitted last. On the other hand, since the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction has been transmitted or an operation instruction has been received in accordance with the timing of communication disconnection, the SQN stored in the backup until communication reconnection is transmitted last. Either the last received or last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the S platform side. When an operation response is returned from the S platform to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. The n + 2 sequence number is sent to the S side.

  Next, the current point-related information (point-related information being counted) is transmitted from the S platform to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the current score-related information storage area of the RAM is provided with a total of four types of counters: an addition counter, a subtraction counter, an external output information counter, and a score counter. Yes.

  The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. When a winning occurs in the S units, an addition number signal that can specify the number of points added is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the addition number counter based on the addition number signal.

  The subtraction number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be subtracted according to the betting number setting. When a bet number setting operation is detected, a bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the subtraction number counter based on the betting number setting signal.

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times the game state has changed. The external output information counter includes a counter that counts the number of bets set by operating the single BET switch 500 or the MAXBET switch 600, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation. A counter that counts the internal winning combination for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operation according to the first to third stop operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is fixed A counter that counts up at the time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs are included.

  Note that counters that count up for each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various external output information transmitted from the main control board 116.

  The score counter is a counter for storing the score (total score) of the player at the current time. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the point counter by the addition amount of the addition number counter when adding and updating the addition number counter, and updates the point counter by the addition amount of the subtraction number counter when adding and updating the subtraction number counter. Subtract update.

  A command requesting data transmission is transmitted from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals. The S units transmit the values of the above four types of counters (addition number counter, subtraction number counter, external output information counter, and score point counter) to the CU at the timing of receiving the command. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the S units have the counter values of the “previous score related information” for each of the three types of counters excluding the score number counter among the above four types of counters. Back up to storage area.

  That is, the value of the addition counter is “addition number”, the value of the subtraction counter is “subtraction number”, the value of the external output information counter is “external output information”, Stored in the area. In addition, when storing in the storage area, the data stored before that is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and saved (rewritten) in the storage area of “previous holding point related information”.

  The addition number counter, subtraction number counter, and external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of “previous holding point related information” are then initialized (cleared to 0) to prepare for the next data count. It is done.

  As a result, the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter change the amount of data (points, external output information) since the last data transmission to the CU (untransmitted to the CU). Data) is stored. When the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change in data from when the data transmission request was last received until this time when the data transmission request is received is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points at the current stage is stored in the point counter that is not initialized every time data is transmitted. Each time a data transmission request is received from the CU, the total number of points at the current stage is transmitted to the CU. That is, each time the S unit receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, the S unit transmits the data change amount from the previous reception of the command to the reception of the current change.

  In other words, the data of addition number, subtraction number, and external output information, which is the current score related information transmitted to the CU immediately before in the storage area of the previous score related information (current score related information transmitted immediately before). Is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted in the next transmission when the current holding point related information is not transmitted from the S side to the CU side. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, a total addition number (addition total), a total subtraction number (subtraction total), an external output information total, and a score are stored in a total data storage area in the RAM.

  The CU updates the total addition number and the number of points based on the value of the addition number counter transmitted from the S platform. Further, the total subtraction number and the number of points are updated based on the value of the subtraction number counter transmitted from the S platform. Furthermore, the cumulative number of external output information is updated based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S units. The external output information cumulative number is updated for each type of external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to “number of bets”, “reel start”, “internal winning by winning combination”, “first to third stop operation”, “display result”, “game state change”, The number (number of times) is accumulated.

  In this way, the CU can manage the latest score by updating the score based on the current score-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Similarly, the CU can manage the latest information by updating the total number of additions, the total number of subtractions, and the total number of external output information with the current point-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. .

  Note that the CU receives the count value of the score counter in addition to the values of the addition counter and the subtraction counter from the S side, but the score stored by itself is stored in the addition counter and the subtraction counter. Updating based on the value, the count value of the point counter sent from the S platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of points sent from the S platform does not match the number of scores managed on the CU side, the score on the CU side is updated with the number of scores sent from the S platform. It will never be done.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform with the current score updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, error notification is performed by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer). Error notification by 1) may be performed), or a predetermined notification for encouraging an artificial response by an attendant may be considered.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU may generate a command for instructing the number of points to be corrected to the number of points managed by the CU side, and transmit the command to the S units. Conceivable. In this case, the S units are provided with a function of correcting the number of points stored therein according to the correction instruction command. The correction instruction command may be a command specifying the number of points managed on the CU side, or the difference between the number of points managed on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side. It is good also as a command which shows.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the S platform, and calculates and manages the current number of points based on the value of the addition / subtraction number counter in particular, and manages it. have. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the S units. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the score becomes 0, the score is also stored on the S platform side. However, a score counter for storing the score on the S side may not be provided.

  The CU does not match the function of performing the score number coincidence determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated current score number with the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform. It sometimes has a function of performing control to shift to an error state (error control at mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the score is stored on the S side, but it can be determined whether or not the score matches the score stored and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of points stored on the gaming machine side does not coincide with the number of points stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU side. For example, the number of points stored on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. May be received to determine whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a medal and a storage area for storing a card balance of the accepted (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 3) of the CU stores the medal according to an input requesting the use of the medal (for example, pressing input of a replay button 319 (see FIG. 89) provided on the CU). A predetermined number of stored medals is subtracted from the storage area. Further, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 89) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation for deducting the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, points recorded on the card, or the number of stored medals) and using it for the game, An addition request number for adding the number of points to be deducted to the point number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side. In response to this, the S platform side adds and updates the score counter.

  On the other hand, when an operation for ordering a so-called wagon service, in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like, is executed, the number of subtraction requests for the player-owned game value is S is sent to the S side. In response to this, the S platform side subtracts and updates the score counter.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) FIG. 91 shows a modification of the card unit 3 shown in FIG. 1, in which the card unit 3 is incorporated in the pachinko machine 2.

  The card unit 3 is incorporated at a position below the game area 27 as indicated by a broken line. A player can insert a card from a card insertion / discharge port 309 provided in the card unit 3, and a player can insert a bill from a bill insertion port 302 provided in the card unit 3. ing. Further, the indicator 312 of the card unit 3 is provided next to the indicator 54 of the gaming machine so that the player can visually recognize it. In the figure, 320 is an IR photosensitive unit, 319 is a replay button, 321 is a lending button, 322 is a return button, and 798 is a call button.

  91 shows a modification of the card unit shown in FIG. 91, which is incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 as an example of the gaming machine. However, the gaming machine to be incorporated is not limited to the pachinko machine 2, and FIG. 88 to FIG. 90 may be the slot machine 2S.

(2) The above-described embodiment discloses an invention having the following configuration.
A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a gaming device (card unit 3) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the gaming machine;
Second control means (LSI 799, 999) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means (CPU of the main control boards 16 and 116) for determining an error that occurs during the control of the gaming machine;
Abnormality notification control means (CPU of main control boards 16 and 116, I / O port) for performing control to notify abnormality when occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
Communicatively connected to the gaming device (connected by connectors 380, 20 or connectors 330, 220);
Including an abnormality determination means (apparatus authentication sequence of FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence of FIG. 27) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
When the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means, output means (notifying the abnormality of the main control boards 16, 116) that outputs abnormality notification information notifying that an abnormality has occurred to the gaming device. The detected payout control units 17 and 117 notify the CU communication control unit 80 from the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82),
The gaming system according to claim 1, wherein the gaming device performs control for notifying abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, when the error occurs during the control of the gaming machine, the abnormality of the first control means itself having a control function for notifying the abnormality is determined by the second control means, and the first control means The first control having an abnormality notification control function when an abnormality occurs in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming apparatus that the abnormality of the control means itself has occurred is output from the first control means to the gaming apparatus. Even when there is an abnormality in the means itself, the abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

  (3) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the P unit communication control unit 81 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 17 and use the information as it is in the P unit or Although it transmits to CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.), and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (4) The authentication sequence and business message sequence in FIGS. 25 to 28 are controls of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80. However, the control of the authentication sequence and business message sequence in FIGS. This may be performed by the payout control unit 17 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2, or may be performed by the payout control unit 117 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 of the slot machine 2S. It may be performed in other gaming machines (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in.

  Further, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 28 may be performed, for example, between an island computer connected to the hall management computer 1 and a computer of the gaming machine, and further includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Further, for example, a communication control unit connected to the storage management device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 28 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit.

  (5) The single authentication sequence shown in FIG. 27 is authentication using two types of SIDs, that is, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, but one type of SID (for example, CU SID) is used. You may use and authenticate with a main control part and a CU communication control part. In this case, authentication that the same SID is stored is performed.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, the number of game balls is displayed on the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of game balls is displayed on the display 54 on the P platform side. Yes. When the number of game balls is displayed by a display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of game balls can be displayed by applying the CU in the present embodiment to P units without a display unit. On the other hand, when the game ball number display unit is provided on the P platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P platform side. When display control is performed on the P platform side, the number of game balls managed by the CU is displayed on the game ball number display section by receiving information on the number of game balls to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes possible to do. In addition, when display control is performed on the P platform side in this way, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the number of game balls having a high decorative (rendering) value. When display control is performed on the P platform side, information on the number of game balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the game ball counter stored in the P platform itself, It is good also as what controls display of a number.

  (7) In FIG. 39, the P-side is provided with a 10-second wait time for the floating ball processing waiting time. Instead, on the P-side, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the out ball The number-the number of winning balls = 0 is determined, or the number of fired balls-the number of foul balls-the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 is determined to determine that the processing of the floating balls has been completed. Also good.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, in the P units that received the prohibition request command, the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to stop hitting the hitting ball, and the variable display device that is changing is stopped or the start winning memory is stored. In the above description, the variable display device based on the above is not stopped until the change, but instead, the change of the variable display device may be stopped.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball is subtracted by a wagon service or the like, as described based on FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of game balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently larger than the number of balls requested for subtraction (for example, more than 30 balls), the CU does not wait for a response from the P unit. The game ball may be subtracted by the side alone, and then an operation instruction for a subtraction request may be transmitted to the P units.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the command is transmitted from the CU to the P unit and the P unit responds to the response to the CU. Conversely, the command is transmitted from the P unit to the CU. Then, the communication form in which the CU returns a response to the P units in response thereto may be used.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control units 17 and 117 is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the command (operation instruction) is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit. 81, transmitted from the S-unit communication control unit 82 to the CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is returned from the CU to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the response (operation response) is returned to the P unit communication control unit 81 and S unit. The communication control unit 82 transmits to the payout control units 17 and 117.

  In this case, the payout control units 17 and 117 execute retransmission of the command shown in FIG. That is, when the payout control units 17 and 117 cannot receive a response from the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 for 1 second after transmitting the command, the command is transmitted to the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication. Retransmits to the control unit 82. Furthermore, the payout control units 17 and 117 also execute the transmission of the communication status request and the communication status confirmation retry shown in FIGS. That is, the payout control units 17 and 117 transmit an operation instruction to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82 and then transmit a communication state request, and the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82. The communication state is confirmed based on the communication state response returned from. When it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, an operation instruction is transmitted again, a communication state request is transmitted, and a communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (11) Further, in the above-described embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and the P unit at regular intervals (for example, 200 ms). Instead, when the necessity of communication occurs, the CU Alternatively, communication may be performed by transmitting data from one of the P units to the other.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, an operation response including a rejection signal that does not comply with a request such as addition rejection ON, subtraction rejection ON, clear rejection ON, etc. is returned from the P platform to the CU. Thus, it is determined that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the P units returning a rejection ON operation response, an operation response including addition / subtraction ball numbers and game ball data not complying with the request from the CU is returned to the CU. On the side, it is possible to determine whether the returned data (the number of added / subtracted balls, game balls, etc.) is in accordance with the request, and thereby determine whether the request has been rejected. Good.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, when a power interruption at the CU or a communication interruption between the CU and the P stand is detected, the hitting is stopped on the P stand side to enter the play stop state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed so that the game can be continued without stopping hitting on the P platform side. In that case, the P subtraction data and cumulative number of starting and subtracting balls generated along with the game that was continued from the time when the communication interruption occurred until the abnormality was recovered and started up are stored on the P platform side. In addition, at the time of activation, the data and game ball data may be transmitted to the CU to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when the command from the CU is not transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the P platform determines that the communication is cut off by the process of FIG. However, the communication interruption may be determined by the following method.

  A connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected is provided in the pachinko machine 2. Referring to FIG. 4, CU communication control unit 80 and payout control unit 17 are connected by a signal line as described above. In addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from card unit 3 is applied. A connection detection signal line to be input to the pachinko machine 2 side is provided. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are formed of the same cable, and the cable unit is disconnected or the connectors 330 and 20 are detached, and the card unit 3 is also disconnected. Since the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V when the power is cut off, the connection detector detects this, and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connectors 330 and 20, and the power supply of the card unit 3 have been disconnected due to the input of the detection signal.

  (15) In the process of FIG. 29, when the P platform receives a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, the P platform is programmed so that the correction request cannot be rejected by the P platform. However, there is a case where a serious error that cannot be corrected such as a game ball has occurred in the P units even though a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received. In consideration of such a severe error state, after transmitting a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON on the CU side, the content of the operation response transmitted from the P unit is checked, and the P unit side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like has been corrected correctly, and if it has not been corrected, control for shifting to an error state may be performed.

  That is, the CU determines in advance when it is determined that a game machine (for example, P units) cannot be added even after receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON in FIG. 29. Error control means for performing control to shift to a specified error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, a severe error notification is performed by the display 312 and a notification that a serious error has occurred is given to the hall management computer 1 to notify the error by the hall management computer 1. It may be possible to promote artificial responses by staff.

(16) On the P platform side, the number of additional balls may be counted as follows.
Counters A and B are provided on the P platform side as counters for counting the number of balls to be added. First, the number of balls to be added is counted by the counter A. When it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of additional balls is counted by the counter B. If it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter B is maintained, while the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the counter A counts the number of balls to be added. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used for counting the number of subtraction balls on the P platform side. Alternatively, it may be used for counting the number of winnings at the starting port 1 and the number of winnings at the starting port 2.

  (17) The P platform does not transmit two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU, but sends one information after adding / subtracting the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU. Also good. That is, such information also constitutes “update information that can specify the change amount”.

  (18) The communication method is not limited to the command-response method described above. The P units may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, the P platform may transmit the ball related information to the CU every time a predetermined amount of information is obtained, instead of transmitting the ball related information at predetermined time intervals. For example, in the case of an additional ball, it may be configured to transmit the additional ball number to the CU every time one or two or more predetermined number of additional balls are generated.

  (19) In the present embodiment, two counters, an addition ball counter and a subtraction ball count, are provided on the P platform side. However, instead of these two counters, a single addition / subtraction counter may be used that increments according to an increase in game balls (such as winnings) and subtracts due to a decrease in game balls (such as bullet firing). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from the P units to the CU.

(20) The present embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, and before receiving a response to the command, a process for reestablishing a communication connection with the gaming machine In the process of re-establishing the communication connection, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side. The command transmission means for canceling the instruction for subtracting the point by the command when the arrival determination means determines that the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has arrived. In order to cancel the point subtraction instruction by the command for instructing the subtraction of the points. When the command is received, whether the score has already been subtracted based on the command for instructing the subtraction of the score, or if the score is not subtracted due to lack of the score, The score corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the score stored in the score storage means.

  (21) In the present embodiment, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU by operating the return button 322. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting the end of the game from a management computer or the like.

(22) The CU and the P stand may be connected so as to be communicable wirelessly instead of wired connection.
(23) By providing the function of the payout control unit 17 on the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 may not be provided on the pachinko machine 2.

  (24) The payout control unit 17 performs control to stop the driving of the hitting ball shooting motor 18 when the game ball counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes zero. However, the payout control unit 17 may execute the control when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can specify and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout controller 17 stops the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thereby, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls designated in advance.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, the presentation unit 50 is provided on the pachinko machine 2 side and various displays are performed by the display unit 54. However, in the pachinko machine 20 that does not include the presentation unit 50, There may be. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the P base 2, Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (26) In the possession ball sharing process shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the stock card stocked in the CU is used as the card B that is ejected in order to divide and transfer (share the possession) to another person. Instead, the card B to be transferred to another person is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 from the outside of the CU, and the ball for split transfer (shareball sharing) is recorded and discharged to the inserted card B. You may make it do. In that case, on the display screen of the ball sharing processing status shown in FIGS. 71 to 74, between the discharging process of the own card as the first process and the discharging process of the shared card as the second process, A shared card insertion process is added.

  (27) In the holding ball sharing process shown in FIG. 66, the visitor card B is first inserted to start the game. Instead, the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU. A game may be started. In that case, the transfer card B used for sharing the ball is taken out from the card stock section in the CU and discharged in association with the shared points, and the player is associated with the number of game balls at the end of the game. The card returned to the card may be taken out from the card stock unit in the CU and discharged. In addition, after the game is started by inserting banknotes, the number of game balls at that time may be associated with the card taken out from the card stock unit when the number of game balls is generated due to the winning. In this case, when the number of game balls fluctuates with the game, the number of game balls associated with the card is similarly varied. Then, when the operation of sharing the ball is performed, the number of game balls associated with the card is changed to the shared points, the card is discharged as a transfer card, and taken out from the card stock section again. You may make it match | combine the remainder which subtracted the share score for the said game ball | bowl from the said number of game balls.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 30), and the communication is disconnected by transmitting a communication disconnection request. 29, instead of FIG. 24, when it is determined that the connection sequence is restarted after the determination, or the SQN backed up by the CU does not match the SQN transmitted from the P unit. Run the connection sequence. However, in addition to them or instead of any of them, a signal (for example, recovery data) indicating that a communication connection is disconnected from the P unit during the game (when not in standby) with the restart of the connection sequence. Etc.) may be transmitted to the CU, and the CU may execute the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 29 based on the signal.

  (29) In the process of split transfer (share ball sharing) of game balls shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, split transfer is performed on the condition that the current game ball is determined to be more than a predetermined number than the game balls to be split transfer You may make it accept | permit. In the case of FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, for example, split transfer (shared ball sharing) is permitted on the condition that it is determined that the current game ball is 200 balls or more than the split game balls. In the case of FIG. 67, split transfer (shared ball sharing) on condition that it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral ball (= 200) from the current game ball is 100 balls or more than the game ball to be split transfer. Is acceptable.

  (30) In the process of split transfer (share ball sharing) of the game balls shown in FIGS. 65 and 67, the number of game balls in the game is card B until the card B is discharged after the card A is discharged. If the number of possessed balls to be written and transferred is no longer reached, control is performed so that the sharing of the score is canceled and the card B is not ejected.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, the unit of the number of game balls and the number of possessed balls is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the units of both may be different. For example, the number of game balls “1” may be converted to “10” when converted to the number of balls.

  (32) In FIG. 66, when the return operation at the end of the game is performed, the card stocked in the card stock part (stock card) is taken out and the number of game balls is associated with the stock card and discharged. Instead, you have a game hall clerk bring a new card, insert the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309, match the number of game balls, and eject the card. Also good.

  (33) In the above embodiment, two types of cards, a membership card and a visitor card, are shown, but the type of card is not limited to this, and for example, only one type of visitor card may be used.

  In the following, effects obtained from various means included in the present embodiment and combinations of various means are listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine that can be played with points, and a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, and a player's gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change, and information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Main possession point storage means for storing points (RAM that stores “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) that updates the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Sub-points update means (payout control unit 17) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage means according to the amount of change,
The gaming machine performs game control based on the points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means (when the game ball counter reaches 0, the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped),
When the game device inputs a signal for requesting the end of the game (an operation signal for the return button 322), the gaming device determines the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means as the holding points at the end of the game. Point determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 37) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored by the main point storage means;
Including instruction information transmission means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payout control unit 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmitting means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmitting means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from when the information was previously received until it is received this time Information is transmitted (values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter in FIG. 5, FIG. 35).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change with respect to the time when the previous update information was transmitted is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmission means transmits the score (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 5). , FIG. 35),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main holding point storage means and the points stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 5; determining the match of the number of game balls) ,
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(1-5) The instruction information transmission means has the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means when the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent. Sending correction information (communication start request including game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to the point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of communication start request including game ball correction ON and number of game balls to P units),
The gaming machine corrects the holding points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means based on the correction information (payout control unit 17; game ball number ON and game ball number ON) Compensation according to

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball game machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at an interval (FIG. 21; once every 200 ms) shorter than the game ball launch time interval (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the amount of change in the point notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Part 17, FIG. 36).

  According to such a configuration, when the update information is not transmitted in time for determination, the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side) Even if there is a deviation between the two, a determination based on the actual score can be made.

(1-8) The instruction information transmission means transmits information for instructing game prohibition to the gaming machine (operation instruction in FIGS. 38 to 40 (with prohibition request)),
When the gaming machine receives the information for instructing the game prohibition, the game prohibiting means (the payout control unit 17 stops driving the hitting ball launching motor 18, 38-39 "banning game").

  According to such a configuration, the prohibition of gaming by the gaming machine can be controlled on the gaming device side.

(1-9) The instruction information transmission means transmits information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to an initial value to the gaming machine (FIG. 37, 63 (operation instruction (with clear request)),
In the gaming machine, the sub-point storage means stores the information based on the fact that the instruction to set the value of the points stored in the sub-point storage means to the initial value is received. It includes a score initializing means (FIG. 37, FIG. 63 (the payout control unit 17 initializes the value of the game ball counter to 0) for initializing the value of the score.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the gaming machine can be instructed to be initialized on the gaming device side.

(1-10) Provided with a connection portion (connector 330) for communication with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points, and that is awarded in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  (1-11) When a signal requesting the end of a game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, the score that is determined by the score stored in the score storage means as the score at the end of the game The confirmation means (main control unit 323; FIG. 37) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-12) When a score updated on the gaming machine side is received from the gaming machine in response to the use in a game and the occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means Including determination means for determining the consistency with the stored points (FIG. 5; determining the match of the number of game balls);
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the score storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determination means It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for transmission to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-14) The gaming device provides information for instructing transmission of the update information at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) in the gaming machine (FIG. 21; 200 ms). To the gaming machine in turn,
The score update unit sequentially updates the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information sequentially received (main control unit 323, FIG. 35).

  According to such a configuration, the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, so that the gaming measure has a detailed reflection of the change in the points on the gaming machine side. Point management is possible.

(2-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game is played by a player, and a communicably connected to the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330 and 20), and the gaming value (prepaid balance) owned by the player A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the number of possessed balls or the number of stored balls),
The gaming device is:
Control means (main control unit 323) for controlling the operation of the gaming apparatus;
Display means (display 312) for displaying to the player the status according to the control executed by the control means in response to the player's operation;
Transmission means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting a display instruction for causing the gaming machine to display a situation corresponding to the control executed by the control means.

  According to such a configuration, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means, it is possible to display a unique display in a mode matched to the gaming machine, but in the case of a gaming machine not provided with a display means. Even if it exists, the player can recognize the situation according to the control executed on the gaming device side in accordance with the player's operation.

  (2-2) The transmission unit transmits the display instruction in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the situation according to the control by the display unit (FIGS. 31 to 34, 37, and 64; display; The display on the device 312 is started and an operation instruction of ON during display is transmitted to the P units), and no end instruction for ending the display of the situation according to the control by the gaming machine is transmitted (FIG. 64; end of display) Display is terminated without sending a command to indicate

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine provided with the display means while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the shift of the display start timing when both the gaming device and the gaming machine have the display means. Thus, it is possible to execute unique display unique to the gaming machine side without being restricted by the display end timing on the gaming apparatus side.

(2-3) The gaming device accepts a recording medium (card) on which information capable of specifying the gaming value owned by the player is recorded,
The control means executes control for authenticating the received recording medium (FIGS. 31 and 64; inquiry to a host server),
The display means displays to the player that the recording medium is being authenticated,
The transmission means transmits a display instruction for displaying on the gaming machine that the recording medium is being authenticated (FIGS. 31 and 64; transmitting operation instructions including card holding and card insertion processing). ).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the received recording medium is being authenticated.

(2-4) The control means adds the points using the player's gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) (FIGS. 31 to 33, FIG. 64; with addition, Send an operation instruction including the number of balls to be added = 5000),
The display means displays to the player that the points are being added,
The transmission means transmits a display instruction for causing the gaming machine to display that the points are being added (FIGS. 31 to 33 and 64; during addition display).

According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the points are being added.
(2-5) The gaming machine can be played with points,
The gaming device adds points using the player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) (FIGS. 31 to 33, FIG. 64; number of balls required for addition, number of balls requested to be added) = Send an operation instruction including 5000)
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmission means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(2-6) A connection portion (connectors 330 and 20 and connection wiring) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game is played by the player, and a gaming value (prepaid) owned by the player A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a balance, number of balls, or number of balls)
Control means (main control unit 323) for controlling the operation of the gaming apparatus;
Display means (display 312) for displaying to the player the status according to the control executed by the control means in response to the player's operation;
Transmission means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting a display instruction for causing the gaming machine to display a situation corresponding to the control executed by the control means.

  According to such a configuration, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means, it is possible to display a unique display in a mode matched to the gaming machine, but in the case of a gaming machine not provided with a display means. Even if it exists, the player can recognize the situation according to the control executed on the gaming device side in accordance with the player's operation.

  (2-7) The transmission means transmits the display instruction in accordance with the timing to start displaying the status according to the control by the display means (FIGS. 31 to 34, 37, and 64; display; The display on the device 312 is started and an operation instruction of ON during display is transmitted to the P units), and no end instruction for ending the display of the situation according to the control by the gaming machine is transmitted (FIG. 64; display end Display is terminated without sending a command to indicate

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine provided with the display means while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the shift of the display start timing when both the gaming device and the gaming machine have the display means. Thus, it is possible to execute unique display unique to the gaming machine side without being restricted by the display end timing on the gaming apparatus side.

(2-8) The control means executes control for authenticating the recording medium when a recording medium (card) on which information capable of specifying the game value owned by the player is received is received. (FIGS. 31 and 64; confirmation to the upper server),
The display means displays to the player that the recording medium is being authenticated (FIG. 64),
The transmission means transmits a display instruction for displaying on the gaming machine that the recording medium is being authenticated (FIGS. 31 and 64; transmitting operation instructions including card holding and card insertion processing). ).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the received recording medium is being authenticated.

(2-9) The gaming device accepts a recording medium (card) on which information capable of specifying the gaming value owned by the player is recorded,
The control means, when a recording medium in which information capable of specifying a player-owned game value is recorded is received, a score is obtained using the player-owned game value specified by the recording medium. Addition (FIGS. 31 to 33, FIG. 64; addition is performed, an operation instruction including the number of balls required for addition = 5000 is transmitted)
The display means displays to the player that the points are being added (FIGS. 31 to 33, FIG. 64; during addition display).

According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the points are being added.
(2-10) The connection unit is connected to be able to communicate with a gaming machine capable of playing a game with points and adding points according to the occurrence of a prize,
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(3-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player's own game value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Backup means for backing up stored data when communication with the gaming device is disconnected (when connectors 330 and 20 are disconnected, when connection wiring is disconnected, or when CU is disconnected) (recovery data shown in FIGS. 48, 55 to 63) The RAM of the payout control unit 17 for storing
Update information that can specify the amount of change specified by the specifying means is transmitted to the gaming device (the payout control unit 17 transmits the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU communication control unit 80),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
A score update means (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine;
At the start of communication with the gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the disconnection of the communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of the communication is based on the end of normal communication (a. Waiting (FIG. 30 The connection sequence is resumed in a state other than that shown in FIG. 48. b. The connection sequence is resumed after the communication disconnection request is transmitted by itself (see FIG. 48), or c. CU is backed up. It is determined whether or not the SQN being transmitted and the SQN transmitted from the P platform are inconsistent, and it is determined that the communication is not completed (abnormal termination) when any of a to c is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the communication is based on the end of normal communication, a command to initialize the stored data backed up by the backup means is transmitted (FIG. 24; a communication start request including recovery clear ON is sent to the P units. Send When it is determined that the data is based on abnormal termination, a correction request for correcting the stored data backed up by the backup means to normal data is transmitted (FIG. 29; SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, A communication start request including SQN = 3, game balls = 300 is transmitted to P units),
When the gaming machine receives an instruction to initialize the stored data, the gaming machine initializes the stored data backed up by the backup means (FIG. 24; clearing recovery data), and receives the correction request. Sometimes the stored data backed up by the backup means is corrected (FIG. 29; “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P units are matched with the information of the CU).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  Further, in the case of normal termination of communication, the stored data backed up in the gaming machine is initialized, whereas in the case of abnormal termination, the stored data backed up in the gaming machine is corrected. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem of data inconsistency between the gaming device and the gaming machine due to abnormal termination of communication.

(3-2) The gaming device selects and designates the target of the storage data to be corrected among the plurality of types of storage data backed up by the backup means, and transmits a correction request (FIG. 13; data correction request Select and specify the sequence number and game ball with Bit1 and Bit2),
When the game machine receives the correction request, the gaming machine performs a correction process on the storage data selected and designated from the storage data backed up by the backup means (FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to select and correct the stored data that needs to be corrected in the case of abnormal termination of communication, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of performing unnecessary correction processing.

(3-3) The backup unit backs up the data of the change amount of the holding point specified by the specifying unit and the data of the holding point (game ball counter, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter),
The gaming device transmits a transmission request for storage data backed up by the backup means to the gaming machine (transmits a recovery request to P machines),
In response to the transmission request, the gaming machine transmits update information that can specify the amount of change in the points backed up by the backup means to the gaming device (including the previous number of balls and the current number of balls). Send recovery data to CU as recovery response),
The gaming device is:
When the communication disconnection with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is determined to be based on abnormal termination, the score storage means stores based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine A score correcting means (FIG. 29; a main control unit 323 that corrects a game ball or the like in accordance with the content of the recovery response),
When it is determined that the disconnection with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on abnormal termination, the score data is corrected by the score correction means among the stored data backed up by the backup means. A correction request for correcting to the processed score is transmitted (FIGS. 13 and 29; a communication start request including data whose data correction request Bit2 is “1” is transmitted to the P units),
When the game machine receives the correction request, the gaming machine corrects the score data among the stored data backed up by the backup means (FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, when it is necessary to correct important data such as score data due to abnormal termination of communication, the score data can be selected and corrected.

  (3-4) The gaming device updates the number each time data is transmitted / received between the gaming machine and the gaming device, and checks whether or not communication is properly performed. When a communication number for transmission is transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication, the abnormal end is determined based on the fact that the communication number is an abnormal value (FIG. 58, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when it becomes necessary to correct the communication number due to abnormal termination of communication, the data of the communication number can be selected and corrected, and the resumed communication is performed properly. Can be confirmed based on an appropriate communication number.

(3-5) Provided with a connection portion (connector 330) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine (pachinko machine 2), the score update means (main control unit 323) updates the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information. And further
At the start of communication with the gaming machine, it is determined whether the disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on the end of normal communication, and based on the end of normal communication When it is determined that it is, the game machine transmits a command to initialize the stored data that has been backed up from the time of communication disconnection (FIG. 24; transmits a communication start request including recovery clear ON to P units). When it is determined that it is based on abnormal termination, a correction request for correcting the stored data backed up on the gaming machine side to normal data is transmitted (FIG. 29; SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 3, a game start request including a game ball = 300 is transmitted to P units).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  Further, in the case of normal termination of communication, the stored data backed up in the gaming machine is initialized, whereas in the case of abnormal termination, the stored data backed up in the gaming machine is corrected. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem of data inconsistency between the gaming device and the gaming machine due to abnormal termination of communication.

  (3-6) The gaming device selects and designates a target of storage data to be corrected among a plurality of types of stored data backed up on the gaming machine side, and transmits a correction request (FIG. 13; data correction request). The sequence number and game ball are selected and designated by Bit1 and Bit2).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to select and correct the stored data that needs to be corrected in the case of abnormal termination of communication, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of performing unnecessary correction processing.

(3-7) The gaming device transmits a transmission request for storage data backed up on the gaming machine side to the gaming machine (transmits a recovery request to P machines),
When the gaming device determines that the disconnection with the gaming machine immediately before the start of the communication is based on abnormal termination, the gaming device transmits the backup that has been transmitted from the gaming machine in response to the transmission request. On the basis of the update information that can identify the amount of change in the score, the score correction means for correcting the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 29; game balls in accordance with the contents of the recovery response) A main control unit 323) for performing correction such as
When it is determined that the disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on abnormal termination, the score data is stored in the stored data backed up on the gaming machine side by the score correction means A correction request for correcting to the corrected score is transmitted (FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, when it is necessary to correct important data such as score data due to abnormal termination of communication, the score data can be selected and corrected.

  (3-8) The gaming device updates the number each time data is transmitted / received between the gaming machine and the gaming device, and confirms whether or not communication is properly performed. When a communication number for transmission is transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication, the abnormal end is determined based on the fact that the communication number is an abnormal value (FIG. 58, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when it becomes necessary to correct the communication number due to abnormal termination of communication, the data of the communication number can be selected and corrected, and the resumed communication is performed properly. Can be confirmed based on an appropriate communication number.

(4-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player's own game value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Sub-points update means (game ball counter) that updates the points stored in the sub-point storage means according to the amount of change;
Update information that can specify the amount of change specified by the specifying means is transmitted to the gaming device (the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU),
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving means (a card insertion / discharge port 309, a card reader / writer 327) for receiving a recording medium in which information capable of specifying a game value owned by the player is recorded;
Main possession point storage means for storing points (RAM that stores “the number of game balls”);
Based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine, a main point update unit (main control unit 323) that updates the points stored in the main point storage unit according to the update information;
When there is a return operation of the recording medium accepted by the recording medium accepting means, return time processing means for transmitting return time information to the gaming machine (FIG. 37; an operation instruction including a prohibition request is sent to the P units. A main control unit 323 and a CU communication control unit 80) to transmit,
Recording medium discharge processing means (card reader / writer 327) for performing processing to discharge the recording medium when the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means is returned;
The gaming machine further includes a game prohibition means (a launch control board 31 for stopping the launch motor 18) to enter a game prohibition state in which a game is not performed by a point when the return time information is received,
When the gaming prohibition means is in the gaming prohibition state and a predetermined condition is satisfied (FIG. 37; when the floating ball processing waiting time (10 seconds) has elapsed), the gaming machine Initializable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing initialization of the stored points stored in the sub-point storage means is transmitted (FIG. 37; an operation response including game completion ON is sent to the CU). Send)
When the game device receives the initializeable information, it transmits information for instructing the initialization of the points to the gaming machine (FIG. 37; sends an operation instruction including clear request to the P machines). And)
The secondary score updating means initializes the score stored in the secondary score storage means when information for instructing initialization of the score is transmitted from the gaming device ( Number of game balls = 0).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, the gaming machine is in a gaming prohibited state when receiving the return information, and transmits the initializeable information to the gaming device when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming device can be initialized. When the information is received, information for instructing the initialization of the score is transmitted to the gaming machine, and when the information is transmitted from the gaming device, the gaming machine When the initialization of the points stored in the gaming machine is executed in response to an instruction from the gaming device when the recording medium accepted by the game device is returned, the score in the unconfirmed stage is initialized. Inconvenience can be prevented as much as possible.

(4-2) The specifying means specifies the amount of change even when the score changes while the game prohibition means is in the game prohibited state (the number of additional balls is determined based on the floating ball winning). Update)
The gaming machine receives update information that can specify the amount of change when the amount of change of the holding point is specified by the specifying unit while the game prohibiting unit is in the game prohibited state. (FIG. 37: An operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU even during the floating ball processing waiting time).

  According to such a configuration, the update information that can specify the amount of change in the points during the game prohibited state is also transmitted to the gaming device, and the amount of change in the points during the game prohibited state Can also grasp the gaming device.

(4-3) While the gaming machine performs game control based on the points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means (when the game ball number counter reaches 0, the driving of the ball hitting motor 18 is stopped),
The recording medium discharge processing means, after receiving the initializable information, the correspondence between the information that can specify the game value corresponding to the score stored in the main possession point storage means and the recording medium that is received The recording medium is ejected after attaching (FIG. 37; after receiving an operation response including game completion ON, the number of game balls stored in the CU is stored in the card as the number of possessed balls (or higher server) , The score stored in association with the card number of the card is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU), and the card is discharged).

  According to such a configuration, after the gaming machine side holding points are confirmed, after the information that can specify the gaming value corresponding to the confirmed points is associated with the recording medium that is received The recording medium can be ejected, and the inconvenience of ejecting the recording medium associated with the information that can specify the point in the middle of the change before final determination can be prevented.

(4-4) The gaming device
A holding point display unit (display 312) for displaying the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means;
Information for instructing transmission of the update information (operation instruction) is transmitted to the gaming machine (CU communication control unit 80 transmits an operation instruction),
Each time the gaming machine receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, update information indicating the amount of change (current ball related information) from when the information was received last time to when it is received this time Is transmitted (values of the added ball counter and subtracted ball counter in FIG. 5, FIG. 35).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change with respect to the time when the previous update information was transmitted is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(4-5) The gaming machine transmits the points (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the sub-point storage means to the gaming device (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 5). FIG. 36),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main holding point storage means and the points stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 5; determining the match of the number of game balls) ,
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(4-6) When the game device determines that the inconsistency is determined by the determination means, the score stored by the main score storage means is stored by the secondary score storage means. Correction information (communication start request including game ball number correction ON and game ball number in FIG. 29) is transmitted to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine includes a score correction means (payout control unit 17; corrects the number of game balls according to a correction instruction command) for correcting the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means based on the correction information.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(4-7) The gaming machine is a ball game machine (pachinko machine 2),
The ball game machine sequentially transmits the update information at an interval (FIG. 21; once every 200 ms) shorter than the game ball firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the amount of change in the point notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (4-8) The gaming machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Part 17, FIG. 36).

  According to such a configuration, the transmission of the update information at the time of determination is not in time, so that the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the points stored on the gaming machine side) Even if there is a gap between them, the determination based on the actual score can be made.

(4-9) A connection unit for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that is equipped with (connector 330) and that can be played with points, and that points are added in response to the occurrence of a prize;
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
A point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
A score updating means (game ball counter) for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Return time information receiving means for receiving return time information transmitted from the gaming device when there is a return operation of the recording medium accepted by the gaming device (FIG. 37; operation instruction including prohibition request present) A payout control unit 17) that receives the CU from the CU;
Including a game prohibition means (a launch control board 31 for stopping the launch motor 18) to enter a game prohibition state in which a game is not performed by a point when the return time information receiving means receives the return time information; further,
Update information that can specify the amount of change specified by the specifying means is transmitted to the gaming device (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU), and the game prohibiting means is configured to transmit the game. When the prohibition state is established and the predetermined condition is satisfied (FIG. 37; when the floating ball processing waiting time (10 seconds) has elapsed), the score storage means stores the score Initializable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing initialization is transmitted (FIG. 37; an operation response including game completion ON is transmitted to the CU),
The score updating means initializes the score stored in the score storage means when information for instructing initialization of the score is transmitted from the gaming device (game ball) Number = 0).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, the gaming machine is in a gaming prohibited state when receiving the return information, and transmits the initializeable information to the gaming device when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming device can be initialized. When the information is received, information for instructing the initialization of the score is transmitted to the gaming machine, and when the information is transmitted from the gaming device, the gaming machine When the initialization of the points stored in the gaming machine is executed in response to an instruction from the gaming device when the recording medium accepted by the game device is returned, the score in the unconfirmed stage is initialized. Inconvenience can be prevented as much as possible.

(4-10) The specifying means specifies the amount of change even when the score changes while the game prohibition means is in the game prohibited state (the number of additional balls based on the winning of floating balls) And update)
The gaming machine sends update information that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device when the amount of change of the holding point is specified by the specifying unit while the game prohibiting unit is in the game prohibited state. (FIG. 37: Even during the floating ball processing waiting time, an operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU).

  According to such a configuration, the update information that can specify the amount of change in the points during the game prohibited state is also transmitted to the gaming device, and the amount of change in the points during the game prohibited state Can also grasp the gaming device.

(4-11) Two change amount storage means for storing the change amount specified by the transmitted update information and storing the change amount specified by the transmitted update information one time before (FIG. 5; An addition ball counter that stores the current addition ball number, a subtraction ball counter that counts the current subtraction ball number, an area that stores the previous addition ball number as the previous ball related information, and an area that stores the previous subtraction ball number),
And arrival determination means (payout control unit 17, FIG. 43) for determining the arrival of the updated information to the gaming device based on predetermined information (SQN) transmitted from the gaming device,
The gaming machine provides update information for the game that can specify the sum of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived. Transmit to the device (FIG. 43).

  According to such a configuration, when it is not determined that the update information has arrived, update information capable of specifying the sum of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means is transmitted to the gaming device. For this reason, it is possible to reliably and efficiently collect information on the points in the gaming device.

(4-12) Each time the information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information that can specify the change amount is received from the gaming device, the update information is transmitted to the gaming device (the number of additional balls) And an action response including the number of subtraction balls)
Change amount storage means for storing a change amount specified by the transmitted update information as the update information (FIG. 5: an addition ball number counter for storing the current addition ball number, a subtraction ball number for counting the current subtraction ball number A counter, an area for storing the number of pre-added balls as the previous ball-related information, and an area for storing the number of pre-subtracted balls)
The change amount storage means stores the change amounts sequentially specified by the specifying means while the state in which information indicating the transmission of the update information cannot be received continues even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the update information was transmitted. Cumulative storage (Fig. 42)
When the game machine receives information instructing transmission of the update information in a state where the change amounts sequentially specified by the specifying means are accumulated and stored in the change amount storage means, the gaming machine stores the change amount storage means. Update information that can identify the accumulated change amount is transmitted (FIG. 42).

  According to such a configuration, the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying unit while the state in which the information instructing the transmission of the update information cannot be received continues even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the update information was transmitted. Is accumulated and stored on the gaming machine side, and at a time when the information for instructing transmission of the update information is received, update information that can specify the accumulated and stored change amount is transmitted. Even when the communication between the game machine and the gaming machine is interrupted, it is possible to reliably collect information about the points in the gaming device.

(4-13) further including addition information receiving means (payout control unit 17) for receiving point addition information indicating that a point equivalent to the value deducted from the gaming value is added;
When the score update means receives score addition information (operation instruction including addition and number of balls requested to be added) indicating that the score equivalent to the value deducted from the gaming value is added, The score according to the score addition information is added to the score stored in the score storage means (FIGS. 32 and 33; added to the number of game balls),
The gaming machine transmits to the gaming device the amount of change in the points specified by the specifying unit during the point addition by the point updating unit and information that can specify the points after the addition ( FIG. 32, FIG. 33: An operation response including the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the number of game balls is transmitted to the CU).

  According to such a configuration, the score after being updated based on the information that can specify the amount of change in the score is compared with the information that can be specified from the gaming machine after the addition. Thus, it is possible to make the gaming device check whether or not they are consistent.

(5-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player's own game value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Includes specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) that identifies the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information that can specify the amount of change together with a communication number (sequence number (SQN)) for confirming whether or not communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is properly performed is provided in the game. (The payout control unit 17 transmits the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU communication control unit 80),
The change amount specified by the specifying means from the transmission of the update information to the next update information transmission is stored as the current change amount, and the change amount is backed up as the previous change amount even after the change amount is transmitted. Change amount storage means for storing (FIG. 5: an addition ball counter for storing the current added ball number, a subtraction ball counter for counting the current subtraction ball number, an area for storing the previous addition ball number as the previous ball related information, and the previous And an area for storing the number of subtraction balls)
The gaming device is:
Including a score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
The update information is received and predetermined information including the communication number is transmitted to the gaming machine (CU communication control unit 80),
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit according to the update information;
The communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is added and updated, information including the updated communication number is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the communication number last transmitted or received is backed up and stored (see FIG. 5; RAM of the main control unit 323),
The gaming machine adds and updates the communication number transmitted from the gaming device, transmits the updated communication number, and backs up and stores the last transmitted communication number (FIG. 5; payout control). (RAM of the unit 17), update information that can specify both the last transmitted communication number and the current change amount and the previous change amount at the start of communication with the gaming device (FIG. 55 to FIG. 63; transmitting recovery data including the last SQN, the previous ball related information and the current ball related information as a recovery response)
The gaming device has a larger communication number transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication with the gaming machine than the last transmitted or received communication number. In some cases, the score stored in the score storage means is corrected using the current change amount and the previous change amount specified by the received update information (FIGS. 57 and 59). 61), when the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is a small value or the same value, the score storage means uses the current change amount specified by the received update information. The stored points are corrected (FIGS. 55, 56, 58, 60, and 62).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  Further, on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side, the last transmitted or received communication number is stored as a backup, and the gaming device stores the backup at the start of communication with the gaming machine. Comparing the communication number with the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine, when the information transmitted by the gaming machine is not received, the score is corrected using the current variation and the previous variation. On the other hand, when the gaming machine does not receive the information transmitted by the gaming device and when the gaming machine and the gaming machine are in the normal state where the other receives the information transmitted by the other, the current change amount is used. To correct the points. As a result, when communication control is resumed, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that communication proceeds while data that should have been transmitted on the transmission side is not received on the reception side.

(5-2) The gaming machine includes sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points, and transmits the points stored in the sub-point storage means to the gaming device. (Send an action response including the number of game balls to the CU),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining the consistency between the points stored in the score storage means and the scores stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 5; determining the match of the number of game balls) ,
When it is determined by the determination means that a mismatch has occurred, a predetermined mismatch processing is executed (error notification and recovery are performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball). A correction start) and a communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU are transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls in the CU).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(5-3) When the game device determines that the inconsistency is determined by the determination means, the score stored by the score storage means is stored by the score storage means. Correction information (communication start request including game ball number correction ON and game ball number in FIG. 29) is transmitted to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine includes a score correction means (payout control unit 17; corrects the number of game balls according to a correction instruction command) for correcting the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means based on the correction information.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(5-4) The change amount storage means accumulates the change amount of the holding point specified by the specifying means as the current change amount until the communication is started after the communication impossible state occurs. (FIGS. 55-63),
The gaming machine transmits, to the gaming device, cumulative update information that can identify the current change amount accumulated in the change amount storage means when communication is started after the incommunicable state occurs. (FIGS. 55-63; send recovery data including the current number of balls),
The gaming apparatus updates the score stored in the score storage means based on the cumulative update information (FIGS. 55 to 63).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the holding point reflecting the change amount of the holding point that has been changed from when the communication failure state occurs until communication is started.

(5-5) Provided with a connecting portion (connector 330) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and that is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, so as to be able to communicate, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
Including a score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
While transmitting predetermined information including a communication number (sequence number (SQR)) for confirming whether or not communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is properly performed to the gaming machine (CU communication control unit 80) receives from the gaming machine update information that can specify the amount of change in the point according to the use to the game and the occurrence of winning (the payout control unit for the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) 17)
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information;
The communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is added and updated, information including the communication number updated and updated is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the last transmitted or received communication number is backed up and stored (see FIG. 5; RAM of the main control unit 323), and further, at the start of communication with the gaming machine, the communication number last transmitted by the gaming machine and the last holding of the gaming machine after the transmission of the update information. Update information that can identify both the current change amount that is a point change amount and the previous change amount that was transmitted as update information before the current change amount is received (the number of balls added from the payout control unit 17) Or receive the number of subtraction balls)
The gaming device has a larger communication number transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication with the gaming machine than the last transmitted or received communication number. In some cases, the score stored in the score storage means is corrected using the current change amount and the previous change amount specified by the received update information (FIGS. 57 and 59). 61), when the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is a small value or the same value, the score storage means uses the current change amount specified by the received update information. The stored points are corrected (FIGS. 55, 56, 58, 60, and 62).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  Further, on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side, the last transmitted or received communication number is stored as a backup, and the gaming device stores the backup at the start of communication with the gaming machine. Comparing the communication number with the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine, when the information transmitted by the gaming machine is not received, the score is corrected using the current variation and the previous variation. On the other hand, when the gaming machine does not receive the information transmitted by the gaming device and when the gaming machine and the gaming machine are in the normal state where the other receives the information transmitted by the other, the current change amount is used. To correct the points. As a result, when communication control is resumed, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that communication proceeds while data that should have been transmitted on the transmission side is not received on the reception side.

(5-6) When receiving from the gaming machine the score updated on the gaming machine side in response to the use in the game and the occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means Including determination means for determining consistency with the stored points (FIG. 5; determining match of the number of game balls);
When it is determined by the determination means that a mismatch has occurred, a predetermined mismatch processing is executed (error notification and recovery are performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball). A correction start) and a communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU are transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls in the CU).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (5-7) Correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the score storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determination means (see FIG. Communication start request including 29 game ball number correction ON and game ball number) is transmitted to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(5-8) Cumulative update information that can specify the amount of change in the accumulated points accumulated on the gaming machine side is received during the period from the occurrence of the incommunicable state to the start of communication (FIG. 55). ~ Fig. 63; receiving recovery data including the current number of balls),
The gaming apparatus updates the score stored in the score storage means based on the cumulative update information (FIGS. 55 to 63).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the holding point reflecting the change amount of the holding point that has been changed from when the communication failure state occurs until communication is started.

(6-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game that is communicably connected to the game machine and owned by the player A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a utility value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM of the main control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”);
One insertion / discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The gaming value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the score storage means, and the gaming machine A score addition / subtraction means (main control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means as a result of the winning, and subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to a game ending operation, the holding point stored in the holding point storage means is associated with the recording medium inserted in the insertion / discharge port, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port. Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 37)
The recording medium processing means accepts the received recording without performing the association processing in response to an operation for sharing the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 65; ball sharing designation). The medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 65; card A (held ball = 0) is returned), and the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 65). 65; gaming ball = 3800 is changed to gaming ball = 2800), and the recording medium associated with the points for the subtraction is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 65; card B (retaining ball = 1000) return) sharing process Execute.

  According to such a configuration, in accordance with the operation for sharing the score, the recording medium that has already been inserted into the insertion / ejection port and received is associated with the score stored in the score storage means. Since it is discharged from the insertion / discharge port without performing the game, the game can be continued using the holding points stored in the holding point storage means even after the recording medium is discharged, and the game does not have to be interrupted temporarily. In addition, it is possible to prevent a reduction in operating rate.

  (6-2) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of the score when the score stored in the score storage means is smaller than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared score. To do.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing of the score is allowed on the condition that the score stored in the score storage means has a predetermined number of margins compared to the score shared, Therefore, the inconvenience of temporarily suspending the game due to the loss of points can be prevented more reliably.

  (6-3) After the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection port without performing the association process, the shared score is stored in the score storage means. The score stored in the score storage means becomes the shared score until the recording medium subtracted from the score and the recording medium associated with the score for the subtraction is ejected from the insertion / ejection port. When the score is not satisfied, the sharing of the score is canceled, and the shared score is not subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 65; card B is ejected after card A is ejected) In the meantime, if the number of game balls in the game is less than the number of the balls to be written and shared on the card B, control is performed so that the sharing of the point is canceled and the card B is not discharged).

  According to such a configuration, after the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection port without performing the association process, the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and the subtraction is performed. Even if a situation occurs in which the score stored in the score storage means is less than the shared score until the recording medium associated with the minute score is discharged from the insertion / eject port, This is dealt with by canceling the sharing of points.

(6-4) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game that is communicably connected to the game machine and owned by the player A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a utility value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM of the main control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”);
One insertion / discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The gaming value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the score storage means, and the gaming machine A score addition / subtraction means (main control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means as a result of the winning, and subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to a game ending operation, the holding point stored in the holding point storage means is associated with the recording medium inserted in the insertion / discharge port, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port. Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 37)
In accordance with the game end operation, the acquired game value corresponding to the score at the game end time, which is added / subtracted and updated by the processing performed by the score addition / subtraction processing means for the recording medium inserted into the insertion / ejection port, is obtained. Including recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 37) for discharging from the insertion / discharge port in a state where identifiable information is recorded,
The recording medium processing means is shared from the score stored in the score storage means in response to an operation for sharing the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 67; share ball designation). The remaining points obtained by subtracting the points to be secured and the securing points (FIG. 67; collateral balls 200) to be secured in order to enable the game during the sharing process are calculated and inserted into the insertion / discharge port. The received recording medium is associated with the remaining holding points and discharged from the insertion / ejection slot (FIG. 67; card A (held ball = 3800) returned), and the shared holding The recording medium in which the points are associated is ejected from the insertion / ejection slot (FIG. 67; card B (holding ball = 1000) is returned) and sharing processing is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing process is executed in a state where the securing points for enabling the game during the sharing process are secured, the game can be continued using the securing points. Since the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted, the operating rate can be prevented from being lowered.

  (6-5) After the sharing process is performed by the recording medium processing unit, a notification for reinserting the recording medium ejected without performing the association process by the sharing process into the insertion / ejection port It further includes notification means for performing (display 312 for displaying the screen of FIG. 73).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to reinsert the recording medium ejected by the sharing process.

  (6-6) When the recording medium processing means executes the sharing process, and the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process is reinserted into the insertion / ejection port, It is determined whether or not the recording medium is the same as the discharged recording medium, and when it is determined that the recording medium is not the same, the recording medium is discharged. In response to the game end operation, the association process is performed, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port.

  According to such a configuration, by re-inserting the player's recording medium once ejected by the sharing process, the points earned by the player can be ejected in association with the recording medium.

(6-7) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmission means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
Including information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
The score addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information (main control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(6-8) A connection part (connectors 330, 20 and connection) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and that is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. A gaming device (card unit 3) that is capable of playing in the gaming machine using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player,
A score storage means (RAM of the main control unit 323) for storing the score;
One insertion / discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
A process for deducting the value for the acquired game specified by the information recorded in the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / discharge port and securing a point for use in the game by the gaming machine A point securing processing means to perform (a main control unit 323 for transmitting an operation instruction including data of the number of balls requested for addition to the P units);
The gaming value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted into the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the points stored in the point storage means, and a prize is awarded at the gaming machine. A score addition / subtraction means (main control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means by generation and further subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to a game ending operation, the holding point stored in the holding point storage means is associated with the recording medium inserted in the insertion / discharge port, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port. Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 37)
The recording medium processing means accepts the received recording without performing the association processing in response to an operation for sharing the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 65; ball sharing designation). The medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 65; card A (held ball = 0) is returned), and the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 65). 65; gaming ball = 3800 is changed to gaming ball = 2800), and the recording medium associated with the points for the subtraction is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 65; card B (retaining ball = 1000) return) sharing process Execute.

  According to such a configuration, in accordance with the operation for sharing the score, the recording medium that has already been inserted into the insertion / ejection port and received is associated with the score stored in the score storage means. Since it is discharged from the insertion / discharge port without performing the game, the game can be continued using the holding points stored in the holding point storage means even after the recording medium is discharged, and the game does not have to be interrupted temporarily. In addition, it is possible to prevent a reduction in operating rate.

  (6-9) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of the score when the score stored in the score storage means is less than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the score to be shared. To do.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing of the score is allowed on the condition that the score stored in the score storage means has a predetermined number of margins compared to the score shared, Therefore, the inconvenience of temporarily suspending the game due to the loss of points can be prevented more reliably.

  (6-10) The recording medium processing means stores the shared score for the shared score storage means after discharging the recording medium from the insertion / ejection port without performing the association process. The score stored in the score storage means becomes the shared score until the recording medium subtracted from the score and the recording medium associated with the score for the subtraction is ejected from the insertion / ejection port. When the score is not satisfied, the sharing of the score is canceled, and the shared score is not subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 65; card B is ejected after card A is ejected) In the meantime, if the number of game balls in the game is less than the number of the balls to be written and shared on the card B, control is performed so that the sharing of the point is canceled and the card B is not discharged).

  According to such a configuration, after the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection port without performing the association process, the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and the subtraction is performed. Even if a situation occurs in which the score stored in the score storage means is less than the shared score until the recording medium associated with the minute score is discharged from the insertion / eject port, This is dealt with by canceling the sharing of points.

(6-11) A connection portion (connectors 330, 20 and connection) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. A gaming device (card unit 3) that is capable of playing in the gaming machine using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player,
A score storage means (RAM of the main control unit 323) for storing the score;
One insertion / discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The gaming value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the score storage means, and the gaming machine A score addition / subtraction means (main control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means as a result of the winning, and subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to a game ending operation, the holding point stored in the holding point storage means is associated with the recording medium inserted in the insertion / discharge port, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port. Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 37)
In accordance with the game end operation, the acquired game value corresponding to the score at the game end time, which is added / subtracted and updated by the processing performed by the score addition / subtraction processing means for the recording medium inserted into the insertion / ejection port, is obtained. Including recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 37) for discharging from the insertion / discharge port in a state where identifiable information is recorded,
The recording medium processing means is shared from the score stored in the score storage means in response to an operation for sharing the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 67; share ball designation). The remaining points obtained by subtracting the points to be secured and the securing points (FIG. 67; collateral balls 200) to be secured in order to enable the game during the sharing process are calculated and inserted into the insertion / discharge port. The received recording medium is associated with the remaining holding points and discharged from the insertion / ejection slot (FIG. 67; card A (held ball = 3800) returned), and the shared holding The recording medium in which the points are associated is ejected from the insertion / ejection slot (FIG. 67; card B (holding ball = 1000) is returned) and sharing processing is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing process is executed in a state where the securing points for enabling the game during the sharing process are secured, the game can be continued using the securing points. Since the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted, the operating rate can be prevented from being lowered.

  (6-12) A notification for re-inserting the recording medium ejected without performing the association process by the sharing process after the sharing process is performed by the recording medium processing unit into the insertion / ejection port. It further includes notification means for performing (display 312 for displaying the screen of FIG. 73).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to reinsert the recording medium ejected by the sharing process.

  (6-13) When the recording medium processing unit executes the sharing process and the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process is reinserted into the insertion / ejection port, It is determined whether or not the recording medium is the same as the discharged recording medium, and when it is determined that the recording medium is not the same, the recording medium is discharged. In response to the game end operation, the association process is performed, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port.

  According to such a configuration, by re-inserting the player's recording medium once ejected by the sharing process, the points earned by the player can be ejected in association with the recording medium.

(6-14) including information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving, from the gaming machine, update information that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
The score addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information (main control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(7-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game that is communicably connected to the game machine and owned by the player A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a utility value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM of the main control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”);
One insertion / discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The game value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the previous score storage means, and the game A score addition / subtraction means (main control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means when a winning occurs in the machine, and further subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to the game ending operation, a recording medium processing means (card return shown in FIG. 37) is performed for associating the score stored in the score storage means with the recording medium and discharging the recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot. Processing)
The recording medium processing means performs an operation for sharing the points stored in the holding point storage means in a state where the recording medium inserted into the insertion / ejection port is received (FIG. 66; holding ball sharing designation). In response, the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and an association process is performed for associating the score for the subtraction with the received recording medium. The shared recording process for discharging the visitor recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot (FIG. 66; returning the card B (holding ball = 1000)) is executed, and the holding point stored in the holding point storage means in accordance with the game end operation. An association process for associating the points with other recording media is performed, and the recording media are discharged from the insertion / ejection port.

  According to such a configuration, in the state in which the recording medium is inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port, the shared score is stored in the score storage means according to the operation of sharing the score. Subtracting from the holding point, and performing an associating process for associating the subtracted point with the received recording medium, and discharging the recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot as a recording medium for holding point. The game can be continued using the remaining points obtained by subtracting the shared points from the points stored in the point storage means, and the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted, thereby preventing a reduction in operating rate. it can. Also, in response to the game ending operation, since the score stored in the score storage means is associated with another recording medium and the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection slot, the player removes the recording medium. You can earn points by acquiring.

  (7-2) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of the score when the score stored in the score storage means is less than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared score. To do.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing of the score is allowed on the condition that the score stored in the score storage means has a predetermined number of margins compared to the score shared, Therefore, the inconvenience of temporarily suspending the game due to the loss of points can be prevented more reliably.

(7-3) The gaming device includes a recording medium stock part (card stock part) for stocking the recording medium,
In response to the game ending operation, the recording medium processing means performs association processing for associating the score stored in the score storage means with the recording medium taken out from the recording medium stock unit, and Drain from the insertion outlet.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to save the trouble of inserting the recording medium into the insertion / ejection slot at the end of the game.

(7-4) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmission means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
Including information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
The score addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information (main control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(7-5) A connection part (connectors 330, 20 and connection) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and that is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. A gaming device (card unit 3) that is capable of playing in the gaming machine using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player,
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM of the main control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”);
One insertion / discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The gaming value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the score storage means, and the gaming machine A score addition / subtraction means (main control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means as a result of the winning, and subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to the game ending operation, a recording medium processing means (card return shown in FIG. 37) is performed for associating the score stored in the score storage means with the recording medium and discharging the recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot. Processing)
The recording medium processing means performs an operation for sharing the points stored in the holding point storage means in a state where the recording medium inserted into the insertion / ejection port is received (FIG. 66; holding ball sharing designation). In response, the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and an association process is performed for associating the score for the subtraction with the received recording medium. The recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection slot (FIG. 66; card B (holding ball = 1000) return), sharing processing is executed, and the score stored in the score storage means is determined according to the game end operation. Corresponding processing is performed in association with another recording medium, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / ejection port.

  According to such a configuration, in the state in which the recording medium is inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port, the shared score is stored in the score storage means according to the operation of sharing the score. Subtracting from the holding point, and performing an associating process for associating the subtracted point with the received recording medium, and discharging the recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot as a recording medium for holding point. The game can be continued using the remaining points obtained by subtracting the shared points from the points stored in the point storage means, and the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted, thereby preventing a reduction in operating rate. it can. Also, in response to the game ending operation, since the score stored in the score storage means is associated with another recording medium and the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection slot, the player removes the recording medium. You can earn points by acquiring.

  (7-6) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of the score when the score stored in the score storage means is less than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared score. To do.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing of the score is allowed on the condition that the score stored in the score storage means has a predetermined number of margins compared to the score shared, Therefore, the inconvenience of temporarily suspending the game due to the loss of points can be prevented more reliably.

(7-7) The gaming device includes a recording medium stock part (card stock part) for stocking the recording medium,
In response to the game ending operation, the recording medium processing means performs association processing for associating the score stored in the score storage means with the recording medium taken out from the recording medium stock unit, and Drain from the insertion outlet.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to save the trouble of inserting the recording medium into the insertion / ejection slot at the end of the game.

(7-8) Points storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving from the gaming machine update information that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
The score addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information (main control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(8-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine) in which a game medium (pachinko ball) is launched into a gaming area (game area 27), and points are added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize,
A point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
Game medium launching means (launching unit 38) for launching game media into the game area;
Launch permitting means (launch control board 31) for allowing the game medium launching means to fire a game medium on the condition that the score storage means stores a score that can be used for a game;
The score used for launching the game medium by the game medium launching means is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and the score according to the occurrence of a prize is stored in the score storage means. A point addition / subtraction means for adding to the points being held (the payout control unit 17 determines the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal, the start opening winning information, and the foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. And the payout control unit 17 subtracts from the number of game balls based on the launch detection signal transmitted from the game ball control unit 34 to the payout control unit 17),
A determination means for determining the presence or absence of points that can be used in the game (FIG. 36; detecting game ball = 0);
When the determination means determines that there are no points, the launch prohibiting means for prohibiting the game medium launching by the game medium launching means (FIG. 36; when the number of game balls = 0, In the P platform, the absence of a ball is detected, and the payout control unit 17 automatically stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls it to a game prohibited state in which a ball cannot be shot into the game area).
When a signal generated by execution of a game using a game medium is detected in the game medium discharge prohibited state by the launch prohibiting means (S10, S12 in FIG. 87 (b), S30-S32 in FIG. 78), an abnormality notification is made. And an abnormality notification means (abnormal display by the display 54, a point of the abnormality notification lamp (or blinking), or abnormality notification by sound from a speaker).

  According to such a configuration, in the launch prohibited state, when an illegal act of illegally generating a prize by transmitting a radio wave is performed, the game is performed using a game medium under the influence of the radio wave. When the generated signal is output, the signal is detected and the abnormality notification means notifies the abnormality, so that it is possible to cope with an illegal act of illegally generating a prize by transmitting a radio wave.

(8-2) Adds points using the game value owned by the player and transmits the points stored in the point storage means to the gaming device that is communicably connected to the gaming machine. Information transmitting means (the payout control unit 17 transmits an operation response including the number of game balls);
When the gaming device determines that the points updated based on the update information transmitted by the information transmitting unit and the points transmitted by the information transmitting unit do not match (FIG. 5; Matching number of game balls is determined) The point correction information transmitted from the gaming device (recovery processing is performed and a communication start request command is transmitted to the P units, and the data correction request included in the command is transmitted. Information receiving means (payout control unit 17) for receiving data of which Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON);
On the basis of the point correction information received by the information receiving unit, the point correction unit for correcting the point stored in the point storage unit (payout control unit 17; P units based on Bit1 data of the data correction request) And the number of game balls (game ball total number information) is corrected to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(8-3) Lifting means for lifting the game medium collected from the game area to the hitting ball launch position when the game medium launching means is operating (S22 and S23 in FIG. 87 (b)) Feeding motor 40, lifting device 190);
A lifting game medium detecting means for detecting a game medium lifted by the lifting means (a ball raising switch (upper) 41a, a ball raising switch (lower) 41b);
The abnormality notification means notifies the abnormality when the detection signal of the lifted game medium detection means is output when the game medium launching means is not operating (S33, S34, S32 in FIG. 78, display 54). Announcement of abnormalities such as “lifting device has been abnormally operated” by the indicator, the alarm of the lifting device abnormality indicator lamp (or flashing), etc. ).

  According to such a configuration, when an abnormal situation occurs in which the detection signal of the lifted game medium detecting means is output when the game medium launching means that is not supposed to be operating is not activated. An abnormality notification is performed by the abnormality notification means, and an abnormality can be found at an early stage.

(8-4) a winning opening (a big winning opening, a normal winning opening, a start opening) through which a game medium launched in the gaming area can win;
Winning detection means (FIG. 86; winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h) for detecting a game medium won in the winning opening;
Ejection detection means (FIG. 86; out ball detection switch 701) that detects game media that have been fired into the game area and discharged from the game area without winning the winning opening;
Junction path detection means for detecting a game medium in a passage path (FIG. 86; merging passage path 702) that allows the game medium detected by the winning detection means and the game medium detected by the discharge detection means to pass together. FIG. 86; a merging path detection switch 32),
The winning detection means and the merge path detection means are configured by different types of detection means (the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h are configured by proximity switches, and the merge path detection switch 32 is configured by an optical sensor. ),
The score addition / subtraction means adds a score corresponding to the occurrence of the winning to the score stored in the score storage means based on the detection of the winning of the game medium by the winning detection means ( The payout control unit 17 adds to the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal, the start opening winning information, and the foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17),
Abnormality determining means for determining the presence / absence of an abnormality by judging consistency between the number detected by the winning detection means, the number detected by the discharge detecting means, and the number detected by the merging path detecting means (by the payout control unit 17 the winning ball) The total number of balls detected by the detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the total and the number of balls detected by the joining path detection switch 32 match.
The abnormality notification means performs abnormality notification when the abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality (in the case where the payout control unit 17 determines that there is not a match and there is a predetermined number of gaps or more) The abnormality display command is transmitted to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 displays an abnormality on the display 54).

  According to such a configuration, when an illegal act of illegally generating a winning by transmitting radio waves is performed, the winning detection means and the joining path detection means are configured by different detection means. Because the influence of illegal radio waves is different, the consistency between the number of detections by the winning detection means, the number of detections by the discharge detection means, and the number of detections by the merge path detection means is lost, and it can be determined that an abnormality It is possible to cope with an illegal act of generating a prize illegally by sending.

(8-5) It further comprises foul detection means (FIG. 86; foul ball detection switch 33) for detecting a foul game medium that has been fired by the firing prohibition means but has not reached the game area,
The passage route allows foul game media detected by the foul detection means to also merge and pass (FIG. 86).
The foul detection means and the merge path detection means are configured by different types of detection means (the foul ball detection switch 33 is configured by a proximity switch, and the merge path detection switch 32 is configured by an optical sensor),
The abnormality determination means determines the presence / absence of an abnormality by determining consistency between the number detected by the foul detection means, the number detected by the winning detection means, the number detected by the discharge detection means, and the number detected by the merging path detection means. The total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated by the payout control unit 17, and the total is detected by the merge path detection switch 32. To determine whether the number matches).

  According to such a configuration, when an illegal act of illegally generating a prize by transmitting radio waves is performed, the winning detection means, the foul detection means, and the joining path detection means are respectively different detection means. Since the influence of the illegal radio wave is different, the consistency between the number of detections by the foul detection means, the number of detections by the winning detection means, the number of detections by the discharge detection means, and the number of detections by the merging path detection means is lost. It is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred and cope with an illegal act of illegally generating a prize by transmitting radio waves.

(9-1) An authentication information management device (key management servers 800 and 803 in FIG. 6) for managing authentication information (SID and authentication key of CU communication control unit or SID and authentication key of payout control unit); A gaming system including gaming machines (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S, card unit 3, card issuing device, Z counter, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in the game hall ,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control unit 323 or main control boards 16 and 116) connected to be able to communicate with the authentication information management device;
Second control means (CU communication control unit 80 or payout control units 17, 117) connected to be communicable with the first control means,
The first control means and the second control means include a pair of authentication information (the SID of the CU communication control unit and the SID of the main control unit, the authentication key as a common key, or the SID of the payout control unit). Authenticates whether or not the communication partner's control means is appropriate using the main control board SID (authentication key as a common key) (device authentication sequence in FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence in FIG. 27),
One of the authentication information for the pair is stored in advance in the second control means (the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in advance in the ROM 809 in FIG. 7, or the payout control units 17 and 117. The SID of the payout control unit is stored in advance in the ROM),
The first control means includes
Storage means (EEPROM 808, EEPROM of main control boards 16 and 116) for storing the other of the authentication information of the pair;
Authentication information specifying information (SID of main control unit or main control board) for specifying authentication information (SID and authentication key of CU communication control unit, or SID and authentication key of payout control unit) to be stored in the storage means SID) for authentication to the authentication information management device (I / O port 807 or I / O ports of the main control boards 16 and 116) for transmitting to the authentication information management device,
The authentication information management device stores the authentication information in association with the authentication information specifying information (stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with the SID of the main control unit). Or the SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key are stored in association with the SID of the main control board), and the authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information transmitted from the first control means is stored. Search and return the searched authentication information to the first control means (return the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control unit, or correspond to the SID of the main control board) Replies with the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit)
The storage means stores the authentication information returned from the authentication information management device (the main control unit 323 stores the returned CU communication control unit SID and authentication key in the EEPROM 808). Alternatively, the main control boards 16 and 116 store the returned SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in the EEPROM).

  According to such a configuration, the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information to be stored in the first control means communicably connected to the authentication information management apparatus is transmitted to the authentication information management apparatus. Authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information is retrieved by the authentication information management apparatus, and the retrieved authentication information is returned to the first control means, and the first control means returns the authentication information. By storing the authentication information, paired authentication information is stored in the second control unit with respect to the authentication information stored in advance in the second control unit. Mutual authentication can be performed between the two control means. Then, the authentication information to be stored in the first control means is not transmitted from the local area in which the authentication information is transmitted from the second control means. Since the authentication information is transmitted, the risk of leakage of the authentication information can be reduced as much as possible.

(9-2) In the second control means, paired authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information is stored at the manufacturing stage of the second control means. (The SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in advance in the ROM 809 at the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 in FIG. )
In the first control means, the authentication information specifying information is stored at the manufacturing stage of the gaming machine (the SID of the main control unit is stored in the EEPROM 808 at the manufacturing stage of the CU, or P units, The SID of the main control board is stored in the EEPROM at the manufacturing stage of S units),
The authentication information specifying information transmitting means transmits the stored authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management apparatus (the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323 is set to I / O). It is transmitted from the O port 807 to the key management server 800. Alternatively, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control boards 16, 116 is transmitted from the I / O port of the main control boards 16, 116 to the key management server 803. It may be configured as follows.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means side stores the authentication information for a pair corresponding to the authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information at the manufacturing stage of the second control means. On the other hand, the first control means side transmits the authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management device to store the authentication information returned from the authentication information management device. Compared to the case where the first control means and the second control means in which the authentication information is stored in the manufacturing stage and the paired authentication information is stored in the gaming machine are also assembled in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty in assembling work that both control means in which authentication information for a pair of pairs is stored must be assembled without error, and authentication information that is not paired is stored. Both systems Can be prevented as much as possible a mistake on the assembling work arises in that the assembly means.

  (9-3) The first control unit and the second control unit obtain the authentication indicating that they are appropriate as a result of mutual authentication using the authentication information, and then the authentication information. May be configured to perform cryptographic communication with each other (processing to communicate using the session key of FIG. 25).

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means obtain mutual authentication using mutual authentication information, thereby obtaining mutual authentication. It is possible to confirm that the business information is correct information, and then perform proper encrypted communication in order to perform encrypted communication with each other using the correct authentication information.

(9-4) A gaming device (card unit 3) used in a game hall where gaming machines (pachinko machines 2, slot machines 2S) are installed,
An authentication information management apparatus (corresponding to the SID of the main control unit and the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit) storing the authentication information and authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information in association with each other A first control unit (main control unit 323) that is communicably connected to the stored key management server 800);
Second control means (CU communication control unit 80) communicably connected to the first control means,
The first control means and the second control means authenticate whether or not the communication counterpart control means is appropriate using the paired authentication information (the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 26). Single authentication sequence in FIG. 27),
One of the authentication information for the pair is stored in advance in the second control means (the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in advance in the ROM 809 in FIG. 7),
The first control means includes
Storage means (EEPROM 808) for storing the other of the pair authentication information;
Authentication information specifying information transmission for transmitting authentication information specifying information (SID of main control unit) for specifying authentication information (SID of CU communication control unit) to be stored in the storage means to the authentication information management device Means (I / O port 807),
The storage means stores the authentication information returned by the authentication information management device specifying and returning the authentication information corresponding to the transmitted authentication information specifying information (the main control unit 323 returns the response information). The SID and the authentication key of the CU communication control unit that has been stored are stored in the EEPROM 808).

  According to such a configuration, the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information to be stored in the first control means communicably connected to the authentication information management apparatus is transmitted to the authentication information management apparatus. Authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information is retrieved by the authentication information management apparatus, and the retrieved authentication information is returned to the first control means, and the first control means returns the authentication information. By storing the authentication information, paired authentication information is stored in the second control unit with respect to the authentication information stored in advance in the second control unit. Mutual authentication can be performed between the two control means. Then, the authentication information to be stored in the first control means is not transmitted from the local area in which the authentication information is transmitted from the second control means. Since the authentication information is transmitted, the risk of leakage of the authentication information can be reduced as much as possible.

(9-5) In the second control means, authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information is stored at the manufacturing stage of the second control means (chip manufacturing of the ROM 809 in FIG. 7). At the stage, the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in the ROM 809 in advance)
In the first control means, the authentication information specifying information is stored at the manufacturing stage of the gaming device (the SID of the main control unit is stored in the EEPROM 808 at the manufacturing stage of the CU),
The authentication information specifying information transmitting means transmits the stored authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management apparatus (the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323 is set to I / O). O-port 807 may be transmitted to key management server 800).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means side stores the authentication information for a pair corresponding to the authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information at the manufacturing stage of the second control means. On the other hand, the first control means side transmits the authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management device to store the authentication information returned from the authentication information management device. Compared to the case where the first control means and the second control means in which the authentication information is stored in the manufacturing stage and the paired authentication information is stored in the gaming machine are also assembled in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty in assembling work that both control means in which authentication information for a pair of pairs is stored must be assembled without error, and authentication information that is not paired is stored. Both systems Can be prevented as much as possible a mistake on the assembling work arises in that the assembly means.

  (9-6) The first control unit and the second control unit obtain the authentication indicating that they are appropriate as a result of mutual authentication using the authentication information, and then the authentication information. May be configured to perform cryptographic communication with each other (processing to communicate using the session key of FIG. 25).

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means obtain mutual authentication using mutual authentication information, thereby obtaining mutual authentication. It is possible to confirm that the business information is correct information, and then perform proper encrypted communication in order to perform encrypted communication with each other using the correct authentication information.

(9-7) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game medium is launched by launching a game medium,
A first control unit (main control board 16) connected to the authentication information management apparatus that stores the authentication information and the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information in association with each other; ,
Second control means (payout control unit 17) connected to be communicable with the first control means,
The first control unit and the second control unit use a pair of authentication information (SID of the payout control unit, SID of the main control board, authentication key as a common key) to communicate with each other. Is authentic (device authentication sequence of FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence of FIG. 27),
One of the pair authentication information is stored in advance in the second control means (the SID of the payout control unit is stored in advance in the ROM of the payout control unit 17),
The first control means includes
Storage means (EEPROM of the main control board 16) for storing the other of the authentication information for the pair;
Authentication information specification for transmitting authentication information specification information (SID of main control board) for specifying authentication information (SID and authentication key of payout control unit) to be stored in the storage means to the authentication information management device Information transmission means (I / O port of the main control board 16),
The storage means stores the authentication information returned by the authentication information management apparatus specifying and returning the authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information (in the main control board 16, the payout that has been returned) The SID and authentication key of the control unit are stored in the EEPROM).

  According to such a configuration, the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information to be stored in the first control means communicably connected to the authentication information management apparatus is transmitted to the authentication information management apparatus. Authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information is retrieved by the authentication information management apparatus, and the retrieved authentication information is returned to the first control means, and the first control means returns the authentication information. By storing the authentication information, paired authentication information is stored in the second control unit with respect to the authentication information stored in advance in the second control unit. Mutual authentication can be performed between the two control means. Then, the authentication information to be stored in the first control means is not transmitted from the local area in which the authentication information is transmitted from the second control means. Since the authentication information is transmitted, the risk of leakage of the authentication information can be reduced as much as possible.

(9-8) A variable display device whose display state can be changed is provided, and a game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and a display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed. A gaming machine (slot machine 2S) that can receive a prize when one game is over and the derived display result is a predetermined display result,
A first control unit (main control board 116) connected to the authentication information management apparatus that stores the authentication information and the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information in association with each other; ,
Second control means (payout control unit 117) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control unit and the second control unit use a pair of authentication information (SID of the payout control unit, SID of the main control board, authentication key as a common key) to communicate with each other. Is authentic (device authentication sequence of FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence of FIG. 27),
One of the pair authentication information is stored in advance in the second control means (the SID of the payout control unit is stored in advance in the ROM of the payout control unit 117),
The first control means includes
Storage means (EEPROM of the main control board 116) for storing the other of the authentication information of the pair;
Authentication information specification for transmitting authentication information specification information (SID of main control board) for specifying authentication information (SID and authentication key of payout control unit) to be stored in the storage means to the authentication information management device Information transmission means (I / O port of the main control board 116),
The storage means stores the authentication information returned by the authentication information management device specifying and returning the authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information (in the main control board 116, the payout that has been returned) The SID and authentication key of the control unit are stored in the EEPROM).

  According to such a configuration, the authentication information specifying information for specifying the authentication information to be stored in the first control means communicably connected to the authentication information management apparatus is transmitted to the authentication information management apparatus. Authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information is retrieved by the authentication information management apparatus, and the retrieved authentication information is returned to the first control means, and the first control means returns the authentication information. By storing the authentication information, paired authentication information is stored in the second control unit with respect to the authentication information stored in advance in the second control unit. Mutual authentication can be performed between the two control means. Then, the authentication information to be stored in the first control means is not transmitted from the local area in which the authentication information is transmitted from the second control means. Since the authentication information is transmitted, the risk of leakage of the authentication information can be reduced as much as possible.

(9-9) Authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information is stored in the second control means at the manufacturing stage of the second control means (of the payout control units 17 and 117). The SID of the payout control unit is stored in advance in the ROM chip manufacturing stage),
In the first control means, the authentication information specifying information is stored at the manufacturing stage of the gaming machine device (the SID of the main control board is stored in the EEPROM at the manufacturing stage of the P and S units). And)
The authentication information specifying information transmitting means transmits the stored authentication information specifying information to the authentication information managing device (the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control boards 16 and 116). (The data may be transmitted from the I / O ports of the main control boards 16 and 116 to the key management server 803.).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means side stores the authentication information for a pair corresponding to the authentication information specified by the authentication information specifying information at the manufacturing stage of the second control means. On the other hand, the first control means side transmits the authentication information specifying information to the authentication information management device to store the authentication information returned from the authentication information management device. Compared to the case where the first control means and the second control means in which the authentication information is stored in the manufacturing stage and the paired authentication information is stored in the gaming machine are also assembled in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty in assembling work that both control means in which authentication information for a pair of pairs is stored must be assembled without error, and authentication information that is not paired is stored. Both systems Can be prevented as much as possible a mistake on the assembling work arises in that the assembly means.

  (9-10) The first control unit and the second control unit obtain the authentication that is appropriate as a result of mutual authentication using the authentication information, and then the authentication information. May be configured to perform cryptographic communication with each other (processing to communicate using the session key of FIG. 25).

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means obtain mutual authentication using mutual authentication information, thereby obtaining mutual authentication. It is possible to confirm that the business information is correct information, and then perform proper encrypted communication in order to perform encrypted communication with each other using the correct authentication information.

(10-1) A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a gaming device (card unit 3) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine. There,
The gaming device is:
First control means (main control unit 323) for controlling the gaming apparatus;
Second control means (CU communication control unit 80) communicably connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means for determining an error that occurs during the control of the gaming device (a CPU 805 that performs determination of an unconnected error, determination of an improper card, etc.);
Abnormality notification control means (CPU 805, display control unit 797, etc.) that performs control to notify abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
Communicatively connected to the gaming machine (connected by connectors 380, 20 or connectors 330, 220),
Including an abnormality determination means (apparatus authentication sequence of FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence of FIG. 27) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
Output means for outputting abnormality notification information (abnormality notification signal) for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means (main control in FIG. 8) CU communication control unit 80 that has detected an abnormality in unit 323 notifies P unit communication control unit 81: I / O port 812 in FIG.
When the gaming machine receives the abnormality notification information, the gaming machine performs control to notify the abnormality (the P-unit communication control unit 81 receives the notification and notifies the payout control unit 17 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the main control board 16 notifies the main control board 16 that the abnormality has occurred, and the main control board 16 performs the control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and reports that an abnormality has occurred in the hall management computer 1 as described above. The signal is transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means determines whether the first control means itself has an abnormality when the error occurs during the control of the gaming apparatus, and the first control means itself has an abnormality. The occurrence of an abnormality in the control means itself is output from the first control means to the gaming machine, and the first control means itself having an abnormality notification control function is abnormal in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming machine. Even when there is, abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

(10-2) A gaming device (card unit 3) used in a game hall where gaming machines (pachinko machines 2, slot machines 2S) are installed,
First control means (main control unit 323) for controlling the gaming apparatus;
Second control means (CU communication control unit 80) communicably connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means for determining an error that occurs during the control of the gaming device (a CPU 805 that performs determination of an unconnected error, determination of an improper card, etc.);
Abnormality notification control means (CPU 805, display control unit 797, etc.) that performs control to notify abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
A communication unit (I / O port 812 in FIG. 7) for communicating with the gaming machine;
An abnormality determination means (apparatus authentication sequence of FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence of FIG. 27) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
Output means for outputting abnormality notification information (abnormality notification signal) for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means (main control in FIG. 8) The CU communication control unit 80 that has detected the abnormality of the unit 323 notifies the P-unit communication control unit 81: I / O port 812 in FIG. 7).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means determines whether the first control means itself has an abnormality when the error occurs during the control of the gaming apparatus, and the first control means itself has an abnormality. The occurrence of an abnormality in the control means itself is output from the first control means to the gaming machine, and the first control means itself having an abnormality notification control function is abnormal in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming machine. Even when there is, abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

(10-3) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game medium is launched by launching a gaming medium,
First control means (main control board 16) for controlling the gaming machine;
Second control means (LSI 799) communicably connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means (CPU of the main control board 16) for determining an error that occurs during the control of the gaming machine;
An abnormality notification control means (CPU of the main control board 16, I / O port) for performing control for notifying the abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
A communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) for communicating with the gaming device installed in the game hall;
An abnormality determination means (apparatus authentication sequence of FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence of FIG. 27) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
Output means (notifying the abnormality of the main control board 16 in FIG. 8) that outputs abnormality notification information for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means. The detected payout control unit 17 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 from the P-unit communication control unit 81).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means determines whether the first control means itself has an abnormality when the error occurs during the control of the gaming apparatus, and the first control means itself has an abnormality. The occurrence of an abnormality in the control means itself is output from the first control means to the gaming device, and the first control means itself having an abnormality notification control function for performing control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming device. Even when there is an abnormality, the abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

(10-4) A variable display device whose display state can be changed is provided, and the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed. A gaming machine (slot machine 2S) that can receive a prize when one game is over and the derived display result is a predetermined display result,
First control means (main control board 116) for controlling the gaming machine;
Second control means (LSI 999) connected to be communicable with the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means (CPU of the main control board 116) for determining an error that occurs during the control of the gaming machine;
Abnormality notification control means (CPU of main control board 116, I / O port) for performing control to notify abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
A communication unit (S unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with a gaming device installed in the game hall;
An abnormality determination means (apparatus authentication sequence of FIG. 26 and single authentication sequence of FIG. 27) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
Output means for outputting abnormality notification information for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means (payout that has detected an abnormality in the main control board 116) The control unit 117 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 from the S-unit communication control unit 82).

  According to such a configuration, the second control means determines whether the first control means itself has an abnormality when the error occurs during the control of the gaming apparatus, and the first control means itself has an abnormality. The occurrence of an abnormality in the control means itself is output from the first control means to the gaming device, and the first control means itself having an abnormality notification control function for performing control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming device. Even when there is an abnormality, the abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

(11-1) Game equipment (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S, card unit 3, card issuing device, Z counter, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in the game hall,
A first control unit (main control unit 323 or main control board 16, 116) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit 80 or payout control unit 17, 117) connected to be communicable with each other;
The first control means and the second control means include pair identification information used for mutual authentication (the SID of the CU communication control unit and the SID of the main control unit, or the SID of the payout control unit and the main control board) SID) and performing authentication processing using the identification information (single authentication sequence in FIG. 27),
The authentication process includes
The second control means generates a challenge code (challenge code A in FIG. 27), transmits it to the first control means (single authentication response 1), and the identification information stored in the first control means A response code (response code A in FIG. 27) is generated from the challenge code received using the (SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808) and returned to the second control means (unit authentication request 2) In the second control means, a first challenge response authentication process (CU communication) for determining the suitability of the received response code using the stored identification information (SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813). The control unit 80 stores the challenge code A transmitted as the single authentication response 1 in the EEPROM 813. The SID of the main control unit is synthesized according to a predetermined algorithm to similarly generate a response code A, and the generated response code A is compared with the response code A received from the main control unit 323 to determine whether or not they match. And)
The first control means generates a challenge code (challenge code B in FIG. 27), transmits it to the second control means (unit authentication request 3), and the identification information stored in the second control means A response code (response code B) is generated from the challenge code received using (the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM 813) and returned to the first control means (unit authentication response 3). In the first control means, a second challenge response authentication process (main control unit) for determining the suitability of the received response code using the stored identification information (SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM 808) 323 is the challenge code B transmitted as the unit authentication request 3 and the CU communication stored in the EEPROM 808 The response code B is similarly generated by combining the SID of the control unit according to a predetermined algorithm, and the generated response code B is compared with the response code B received as the unit authentication response 3 to determine whether or not they match. Including).

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means store the pair identification information used for mutual authentication, and the challenge code is transmitted from one control means to the other control means. However, since the response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means and returned to the one control means, the challenge-response authentication is performed. Even if a challenge code or response code sent or received between the two is leaked, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information, and to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means due to the leakage of the identification information as much as possible Can do.

  (11-2) The gaming machine may be configured as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game is played by launching a gaming medium in a gaming area.

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine in which a game is played by launching a game medium in the game area, the first control means and the second control means store the pair identification information used for mutual authentication. A challenge code is transmitted from one control means to the other control means, a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means, and returned to the one control means. Because challenge-response authentication is performed, even if a challenge code or response code transmitted / received between both control means is leaked, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information, Unauthorized acts on the control means due to the leakage of identification information can be prevented as much as possible.

  (11-3) The gaming machine includes a variable display device whose display state can be changed, and a game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and a display result of the variable display device is derived. It may be configured as a gaming machine (slot machine 2S) in which a winning can be generated when one game is ended by being displayed and the display result obtained and displayed is a predetermined display result. .

  According to such a configuration, the variable display device whose display state can be changed is provided, and the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed. In the gaming machine in which a winning can be generated when one game is finished and the derived display result becomes a predetermined display result, the first control means and the second control means Stores the identification information of the pair used for mutual authentication, and transmits the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and receives the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means Since a response code is generated and sent back to one control means, challenge-response authentication is performed. Even responsible sales person or response code is leaked, it is difficult to identify the identification information stored, can be prevented as much as possible fraud to the control unit due to leakage of the identification information.

(11-4) The first control means and the second control means store a pair of authentication information used for mutual authentication (EEPROMs 808 and 813 store an authentication key consisting of a common key)
The authentication process further includes:
The first control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the second control means (the main control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808). An encrypted random number A obtained by encrypting the random number A is generated and transmitted as an authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit), and the second control unit performs arithmetic processing on the result data using the authentication information. The result data of the arithmetic processing is sent back to the first control means (the CU communication control unit decrypts the encrypted random number A using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 to generate the plaintext random number A. The first authentication process (sent to the CU communication control unit as an authentication response 1), and checks the consistency between the result data returned by the first control means and the transmitted result data (in the main control unit 323, Receive A random number A and the transmitted random number A makes a determination of whether or not they are coincident with each authentication request 1),
The second control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the first control means (the CU communication control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813). And generating an encrypted random number B obtained by encrypting the random number B and sending it as an authentication response 1 to the main control unit), and the first control means performs an arithmetic process on the result data using the authentication information. The result data of the arithmetic processing is returned to the second control means (the main control unit decrypts the encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 and generates a plaintext random number B for authentication). The request 2 is transmitted to the CU communication control unit), and the second authentication process (in the CU communication control unit 80) checks the consistency between the result data returned by the second control means and the transmitted result data. Recieved May be configured to include a number B and the random number B sent in the authentication response 1 performs the determination whether or not to match) and.

  According to such a configuration, authentication processing using the pair authentication information used for mutual authentication stored in the first control means and the second control means is also executed. Mutual authentication becomes possible and security is improved. Moreover, since this authentication process also transmits / receives the result data obtained by executing the calculation process using the stored authentication information, even if the transmitted / received result data leaks out, the authentication information It is difficult to specify and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means due to information leakage as much as possible.

  (11-5) The first control unit and the second control unit obtain the authentication indicating that the results of the first authentication process and the second authentication process are appropriate, and then the authentication information. May be configured to perform cryptographic communication with each other (processing to communicate using the session key of FIG. 25).

  According to such a configuration, it is confirmed that the authentication information indicating that the results of the first authentication process and the second authentication process using the paired authentication information stored with each other are appropriate and the authentication information is correct. After the confirmation, in order to perform encryption communication with each other using the authentication information, it is possible to perform appropriate encryption communication with a correct pair of authentication information.

(12-1) A gaming device (card unit 3) used in a game hall where gaming machines (pachinko machines 2, slot machines 2S) are installed,
Control means (main control unit 323) for generating and outputting instruction information (operation instruction) to other devices (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S, etc.) other than the gaming device;
A communication control device (CU communication control unit 80) that relays communication between the other device and the control means;
The communication control apparatus receives the instruction information output from the control means and outputs the instruction information for transmission to the other apparatus (outputs an operation instruction to the P or S unit), and the output instruction information Response information (operation response) is received from the other device and transmitted to the control means (the operation response received from the P or S unit is transmitted to the main control unit 323),
The control means requests the communication control device to transmit communication state data indicating whether or not the reception state of the instruction information by the communication control device is normal after outputting the instruction information to the communication control device. (FIG. 28 (a) (b); after transmitting an operation instruction to the CU communication control unit, a communication state request is transmitted),
When there is a request for transmission of the communication status data after receiving the instruction information, the communication control device transmits the communication status data to the control means (FIGS. 28A and 28B; CU communication control unit) When receiving a communication status request after receiving an operation instruction, a communication status response is transmitted to the main control unit).

  According to such a configuration, after the control means outputs the instruction information to the communication control device, transmission of communication state data indicating whether the reception state of the command information by the communication control device is normal is sent to the communication control device. When the communication control device requests and transmits the communication state data after receiving the instruction information, the control unit transmits the communication state data to the control unit. Whether or not the reception state of the instruction information is normal can be determined based on the above. As a result, the occurrence of a communication trouble that the reception state of the instruction information by the communication control device is not normal can be detected early.

(12-2) The control means includes:
Determination means for determining whether or not the reception state by the communication control device is normal based on the transmitted communication state data (FIGS. 28A and 28B; the main control unit confirms the communication state, Whether to normalize)
A first re-execution unit for executing again a process of requesting the communication control device to transmit the communication state data after the instruction information is output to the communication control device when the determination unit determines that the information is not normal; 28 (b); the main control unit executes a communication status check retry).

  According to such a configuration, when the control means that has received the communication status data determines that the communication status data is not normal based on the communication status data, the communication control device transmits the communication status data after outputting the instruction information to the communication device. Therefore, it is possible to re-check whether or not a communication trouble has really occurred, and to make a correct judgment without any mistake.

  (12-3) When the response means for the output instruction information is not returned in a state where the determination means determines that the reception state by the communication control device is normal by the determination means, A second re-execution unit (FIG. 22; the main control unit retransmits the command when the response is not received for one second after transmitting the command) for executing again the process of outputting the instruction information to the communication control device It may be configured as follows.

  According to such a configuration, the instruction information output from the control device and received by the communication control device is transmitted to the other device in a state in which the reception state by the communication control device is normal, and the response information for the instruction information is transmitted to the other device. The control means re-executes the process of outputting the instruction information to the communication control apparatus when no response information is returned from the communication control apparatus to the communication control apparatus and transmitted from the communication control apparatus to the control means. In addition, it is possible to confirm again the trouble that has occurred on the other device side from the communication control device, and it is possible to make a correct judgment without error.

(12-4) The control means and the communication control device store authentication information for a pair used for mutual authentication (store an authentication key composed of a common key in the EEPROMs 808 and 813), and store the authentication information. To perform authentication processing (device authentication sequence in FIG. 26),
The authentication process includes
The control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the communication control device (the main control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 to generate the random number A. An encrypted encrypted random number A is generated and transmitted as an authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit), and the communication control device performs an arithmetic process on the result data using the authentication information, and the arithmetic process The result data is returned to the control means (the CU communication control unit decrypts the encrypted random number A using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 to generate a plaintext random number A, and the CU communication control unit as an authentication response 1). A first authentication process for checking the consistency between the result data returned by the control means and the transmitted result data (in the main control unit 323, the received random number A and the authentication And the random number A sent in determined 1 and determines whether or not match),
The communication control apparatus executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the control means (the CU communication control unit uses a random number B using an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813). And an encrypted response random number B is generated and transmitted as an authentication response 1 to the main control unit), and the control means performs an arithmetic process on the result data using the authentication information, and the result of the arithmetic process Data is returned to the communication control device (the main control unit decrypts the encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 to generate a plaintext random number B, and sends it as an authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit. A second authentication process for checking the consistency between the result data returned by the communication control device and the transmitted result data (the CU communication control unit 80 recognizes the received random number B). Response 1 and transmitted random number B makes a determination of whether the match) and may be configured to include.

  According to such a configuration, the authentication process using the pair authentication information stored in the control means and the communication control device, which is used for mutual authentication, is executed, so that more reliable mutual authentication is possible. Security is improved. Moreover, since this authentication process transmits / receives the result data obtained by executing the arithmetic process using the stored authentication information, even if the transmitted / received result data leaks, the authentication information It is difficult to specify and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means due to information leakage as much as possible.

(12-5) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game medium is launched by launching a game medium,
Control means (payout control unit 17) for generating and outputting instruction information to other devices (such as card unit 3) other than the gaming machine;
A communication control device (P-unit communication control unit 81) that relays communication between the other device and the control means;
The communication control device receives the instruction information output from the control means and outputs the instruction information for transmission to the other device (outputs an operation instruction to the card unit 3 or the like). Response information is received from the other device and transmitted to the control means (operation response is received and transmitted to the payout control unit 17),
The control means requests the communication control device to transmit communication state data indicating whether or not the reception state of the instruction information by the communication control device is normal after outputting the instruction information to the communication control device. (Send an operation instruction to the P unit communication control unit 81 and then send a communication status request),
When there is a request for transmission of the communication state data after receiving the instruction information, the communication control device transmits the communication state data to the control means (after the P unit communication control unit 81 receives the operation instruction). When a communication status request is received, a communication status response is transmitted to the payout control unit 17).

  According to such a configuration, after the control means outputs the instruction information to the communication control device, transmission of communication state data indicating whether the reception state of the command information by the communication control device is normal is sent to the communication control device. When the communication control device requests and transmits the communication state data after receiving the instruction information, the control unit transmits the communication state data to the control unit. Whether or not the reception state of the instruction information is normal can be determined based on the above. As a result, the occurrence of a communication trouble that the reception state of the instruction information by the communication control device is not normal can be detected early.

(12-6) A variable display device whose display state can be changed is provided, and a game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and a display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed. A gaming machine (slot machine 2S) that can receive a prize when one game is over and the derived display result is a predetermined display result,
Control means (payout control unit 117) for generating and outputting instruction information to devices other than the gaming machine;
A communication control device (S unit communication control unit 82) that relays communication between the other device and the control means;
The communication control device receives the instruction information output from the control means and outputs the instruction information for transmission to the other device (outputs an operation instruction to the card unit 3 or the like). Response information is received from the other device and transmitted to the control means (operation response is received and transmitted to the payout control unit 117),
The control means requests the communication control device to transmit communication state data indicating whether or not the reception state of the instruction information by the communication control device is normal after outputting the instruction information to the communication control device. (Send a communication status request after sending an operation instruction to the S unit communication control unit 82),
When there is a request for transmission of the communication state data after receiving the instruction information, the communication control device transmits the communication state data to the control means (after the S-unit communication control unit 82 receives the operation instruction). When a communication status request is received, a communication status response is transmitted to the payout control unit 117).

  According to such a configuration, after the control means outputs the instruction information to the communication control device, transmission of communication state data indicating whether the reception state of the command information by the communication control device is normal is sent to the communication control device. When the communication control device requests and transmits the communication state data after receiving the instruction information, the control unit transmits the communication state data to the control unit. Whether or not the reception state of the instruction information is normal can be determined based on the above. As a result, the occurrence of a communication trouble that the reception state of the instruction information by the communication control device is not normal can be detected early.

(12-7) The control means includes
Determination means for determining whether or not the reception state by the communication control device is normal based on the transmitted communication state data (the payout control units 17 and 117 check the communication state and determine whether or not normalization is performed) And)
A first re-execution unit for executing again a process of requesting the communication control device to transmit the communication state data after the instruction information is output to the communication control device when the determination unit determines that the information is not normal; The payout control units 17 and 117 may execute a communication state check retry).

  According to such a configuration, when the control means that has received the communication status data determines that the communication status data is not normal based on the communication status data, the communication control device transmits the communication status data after outputting the instruction information to the communication device. Therefore, it is possible to re-check whether or not a communication trouble has really occurred, and to make a correct judgment without any mistake.

  (12-8) When the response information with respect to the output instruction information is not returned in a state where the determination unit determines that the reception state by the communication control device is normal by the determination unit, A second re-execution unit that re-executes the process of outputting the instruction information to the communication control device (the payout control units 17 and 117 retransmit the command when a response is not received for one second after the command is transmitted) It may be configured as follows.

  According to such a configuration, the instruction information output from the control device and received by the communication control device is transmitted to the other device in a state in which the reception state by the communication control device is normal, and the response information for the instruction information is transmitted to the other device. The control means re-executes the process of outputting the instruction information to the communication control apparatus when no response information is returned from the communication control apparatus to the communication control apparatus and transmitted from the communication control apparatus to the control means. In addition, it is possible to confirm again the trouble that has occurred on the other device side from the communication control device, and it is possible to make a correct judgment without error.

(12-9) The control means and the communication control device store authentication information for a pair used for mutual authentication, perform authentication processing using the authentication information,
The authentication process includes
The control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the communication control device (using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM for the main control boards 16 and 116). An encrypted random number A obtained by encrypting the random number A is generated and transmitted as the authentication request 1 to the payout control units 17 and 117), and the communication control device performs arithmetic processing on the result data using the authentication information. The result data of the arithmetic processing is returned to the control means (the payout control units 17 and 117 decrypt the encrypted random number A using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM to generate a plaintext random number A and authenticate it. 1 is transmitted to the main control boards 16 and 116 as a response 1), and a first authentication process (main control boards 16 and 116) for checking the consistency between the result data returned by the control means and the transmitted result data. The, it is determined whether the random number A that has sent the random number A received in the authentication request 1 match)
The communication control device executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the control means (the payout control units 17 and 117 use the authentication key stored in the EEPROM) An encrypted random number B obtained by encrypting the random number B is generated and transmitted to the main control boards 16 and 116 as an authentication response 1), and the control means performs arithmetic processing on the result data using the authentication information. The result data of the arithmetic processing is sent back to the communication control device (the main control boards 16 and 116 decrypt the encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM to generate a plaintext random number B and authenticate it. A second authentication process (payout control units 17, 1) that checks the consistency between the result data returned by the communication control device and the transmitted result data. In 7, it is determined whether the random number B of the received random number B sent in the authentication response 1 matches) and may be configured to include.

  According to such a configuration, the authentication process using the pair authentication information stored in the control means and the communication control device, which is used for mutual authentication, is executed, so that more reliable mutual authentication is possible. Security is improved. Moreover, since this authentication process transmits / receives the result data obtained by executing the arithmetic process using the stored authentication information, even if the transmitted / received result data leaks, the authentication information It is difficult to specify and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means due to information leakage as much as possible.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 4 wooden frame, 5 front frame, 6 glass door, 10 glass door opening solenoid, 11 front frame opening solenoid, 12 glass door closing detector, 13 front frame closing detector, 16,116 main control board, 17,117 payout control unit, 18 hitting ball motor, 20 connection unit, 26 game board, 309 card insertion / discharge port, 312 indicator, 319 replay button, 321 rental button, 312 indicator 322 Return button, 323 control unit, 324 external communication unit, 325 gaming machine communication unit, 327 card reader / writer, 330 connection unit, 32 merge path detection switch, 33 foul ball detection switch, 50 effect unit, 54 display.

Claims (1)

A gaming system that includes an authentication information management device that manages authentication information, and a gaming machine installed in a game hall,
The gaming machine is
First control means communicably connected to the authentication information management device;
And second control means communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control means and the second control means authenticate whether or not the communication counterpart control means is appropriate using a pair of authentication information.
One of the authentication information for the pair is stored in advance in the second control means,
The first control means includes
Storage means for storing the other of the pair authentication information;
Authentication information specifying information transmitting means for transmitting authentication information specifying information for specifying authentication information to be stored in the storage means to the authentication information management device,
The authentication information management apparatus stores authentication information in association with the authentication information specifying information, and authentication information corresponding to the authentication information specifying information transmitted from the first control means. And returning the searched authentication information to the first control means,
The storage means stores authentication information returned from the authentication information management device,
The first control unit and the second control unit perform cryptographic communication with each other using the authentication information when the communication partner control unit is authenticated using the authentication information. A gaming system characterized by that.